Yamaha DSP-1 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: DSP-1

Categorie: Processors

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

DSP-A1

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

U C A

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

STANDBY/ON

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating

instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions

should be followed.

5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near

water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen

sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming

pool, etc.

6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a

cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.

6A A unit and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause

the unit and

cart combination to overturn.

7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit

should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its

location or position does not interfere with its proper

ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated

on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the

ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation,

such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow

of air through the ventilation openings.

9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances

that produce heat.

10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a

power supply only of the type described in the operating

instructions or as marked on the unit.

11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or

pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying

particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.

12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long

period of time.

14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that

objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the

inside of the unit.

15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced

by qualified service personnel when:

A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been

damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the

unit; or

C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or

D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or

exhibits a marked change in performance; or

E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.

16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit

beyond those means described in the operating

instructions. All other servicing should be referred to

qualified service personnel.

17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located

away from power lines.

18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead

symbol, within an equilateral triangle,

is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the

appliance.

•

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

CAUTION

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in

the space below.

Model:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of

the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place

for future reference.

English

SPECIAL NOTES FOR FCC COMPOSITE DEVICE (for US customers only)

This device is a composite system. The digital device component may not cause harmful interference.

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.

Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product

is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try

to eliminate the problem by using one of the following

measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s

Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of

your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the

sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring

or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime (for US customers only)

After unpacking, check that the following parts are included.

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

Remote Control Transmitter Batteries (size AA, R6, UM-3)

User function stickers

CONTENTS

Thank you for selecting this YAMAHA AV Amplifier.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

...................................................... Inside of the Front Cover

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ............................................... 1

FEATURES ........................................................................... 3

CAUTION .............................................................................. 3

NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER .................................................................... 4

PROFILE OF THIS UNIT ..................................................... 5

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................................... 8

CONNECTIONS ................................................................. 10

CONNECTING AUDIO/VIDEO SOURCE EQUIPMENT

TO THIS UNIT..................................................................... 10

CONNECTING SPEAKERS.............................................. 18

PLUGGING IN THIS UNIT................................................. 22

CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS ......................... 23

FRONT PANEL................................................................... 23

DISPLAY PANEL ................................................................ 25

ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT ............. 26

SELECTING THE OUTPUT MODES SUITABLE FOR

YOUR SPEAKER SYSTEM (IN THE “SET MENU” MODE)

............................................................................................... 26

SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT............................. 29

ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE ............ 32

BASIC OPERATIONS ....................................................... 39

TO PLAY A SOURCE......................................................... 39

TO RECORD A SOURCE TO TAPE (OR MD)

(OR DUBBING FROM A TAPE TO ANOTHER)............. 42

FOR SOUND CONTROL ON THIS UNIT........................ 44

USING DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP)

.............................................................................................. 45

PLAYING A SOURCE WITH AN EFFECT OF THE

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) .............. 45

ADJUSTING OUTPUT LEVEL OF THE CENTER, RIGHT

REAR, LEFT REAR, FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS AND

SUBWOOFER .................................................................... 48

BRIEF OVERVIEW OF DIGITAL SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS ....................................................................... 50

ON SCREEN DISPLAY .................................................... 55

CREATING YOUR OWN SOUND FIELDS .................... 56

SELECTING AND EDITING PROGRAM PARAMETERS

............................................................................................... 57

DESCRIPTIONS OF THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD

PARAMETERS ................................................................... 58

SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER ......................................... 61

REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER ........................... 62

BASIC OPERATIONS (When the lid is open) ................. 62

LEARNING NEW CONTROL FUNCTIONS

(When the lid is open).......................................................... 64

USING OPERATION CONTROL KEYS

(When the lid is closed) ...................................................... 66

MACRO OPERATIONS (When the lid is closed) ............ 68

LEARNING A NEW FUNCTION ....................................... 70

MAKING A NEW MACRO ................................................. 71

CLEARING LEARNED FUNCTIONS .............................. 72

TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................... 73

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 76

English

●

7 Speaker Configuration

Main: 110W + 110W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.015% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Center: 110W (8Ω) RMS Output Power,

0.015% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Rear: 110W + 110W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.015% THD, 20–20,000 Hz

Front: 35W + 35W (8Ω) RMS Output

Power, 0.05% THD, 1 kHz

●

Digital Sound Field Processor

●

Dolby Digital (AC-3) Decoder

●

Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder

●

DTS Decoder

●

CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound

Experience by the Combination of

YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby

Surround or DTS

●

Automatic Input Balance Control for

Dolby Pro Logic Surround

●

Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker

Balance Adjustment

●

Speaker Output Mode Changing

Capability

●

“SET MENU” Mode which Provides You

with 12 Titles of Setting Changes and

Adjustments for Using This Unit in the

Best Condition in Your Audio/Video

System

● BASS EXTENSION Switch for Reinforcing

Bass Response

● On Screen Display Function Helpful in

Controlling This Unit

●

REC OUT Selector which is Independent of

Input Source Selection

● SLEEP Timer

●

Digital Audio Signal Terminals:

5 OPTICAL Inputs, 3 COAXIAL Inputs,

1 DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF Input,

1 OPTICAL Output

●

6 Channel Audio Signal Input Terminals for

Connecting with an External Audio Signal

Decoder etc.

● Video Signal Input/Output Capability

(Including S Video Connections)

●

“Learning” Remote Control Transmitter

FEATURES

1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from

windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration,

dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming

(transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock,

do not expose the unit to rain or water.

3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set,

contact your dealer.

4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires.

When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and

the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull the

wires themselves.

5. The openings on the cabinet assure proper ventilation of

the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature

inside the cabinet will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing

objects against these openings, and install the unit in well-

ventilated condition. Make sure to allow a space of at least

10 cm behind, 10 cm on the both sides and 30 cm above

the top panel of the unit. Otherwise it may not only damage

the unit, but also cause fire.

6. The voltage to be used must be the same as that specified

on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than that

which is specified is dangerous and may result in a fire or

other type of accident causing damage. YAMAHA will not

be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of

this unit with a voltage other than that which is specified.

7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with

other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move

this unit farther away from such equipment if interference

is observed.

8. Always set the VOLUME control to “–

∞

” before starting

the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an

appropriate level after playback has been started.

9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents;

this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

10.Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

regarding common operating errors before concluding that

the unit is faulty.

11.When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(ie., vacation, etc.), disconnect the AC power plug from the

wall outlet.

12.To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power

plug and antenna cable when there is an electrical storm.

13.Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not

defeated.

14.Do not connect an audio equipment to the AC outlet on the

rear panel if the equipment requires more power than the

outlet is rated to provide.

CAUTION : READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit

itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode.

In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

Voltage Selector (China and General Models only)

The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must

be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into

the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models

only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in

different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located

at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area.

Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of

this unit from the AC outlet.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE

OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT AND FULLY INSERT.

THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS MEETS ALL

REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN INTERFERENCE-

CAUSING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS.

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this

unit may be damaged.

IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE

STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED;

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to

either end closely. If so, set the switch to either end closely.

Battery installation

Battery replacement

If you find that the remote control transmitter must be used

closer to the main unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both

batteries with new ones.

Notes

●

Use only AA, R6, UM-3 batteries for replacement.

●

Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside

the battery compartment.)

●

Remove the batteries if the remote control transmitter will

not be used for an extended period of time.

●

If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come in contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly

before installing new batteries.

●

After you change batteries, make sure to press the RESET

button inside the battery compartment.

Remote control transmitter operation range

Notes

●

There should be no large obstacles between the remote

control transmitter and the main unit.

●

If the remote control sensor is directly illuminated by strong

lighting (especially an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.),

it might cause the remote control transmitter not to work

correctly. In this case, reposition the main unit to avoid direct

lighting.

30°

Remote control

sensor

Within approximately

6 m (19.7 feet)

NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

I00W MAX. TOTAL

200W MAX.

UNSWITCHED

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

EFFECT : 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

FRONT

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B : 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

EFFECT : 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

FRONT

A B

A OR B

FRONT REAR

(SURROUND)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

(General model)

English

PROFILE OF THIS UNIT

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital

sound field processor. The processor allows you to

electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound

field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like

experience in your listening room. This unit has a total of 12

digital sound field processor (DSP) modes. You can create an

excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field

(this will, of course, depend on what you will be listening to),

and adding desired adjustments.

In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Pro Logic Surround

decoder and Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder for multi-channel

sound reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded video sources,

and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of DTS-

encoded audio and video sources. The operation of the Dolby

Pro Logic Surround, Dolby Digital (AC-3) or DTS decoder can be

controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including

combined operations of DSP and Dolby Pro Logic Surround, DSP

and Dolby Digital (AC-3), or DSP and DTS.

This unit also features a built-in automatic input balance

control. This always assures you the best performance without

manual adjustment.

Digital Sound Field Processing

What is it that makes live music so good? Today’s advanced

sound reproduction technology lets you get extremely close to

the sound of a live performance, but chances are you’ll still

notice something missing, the acoustic environment of the live

concert hall. Extensive research into the exact nature of the

sonic reflections that create the ambience of a large hall has

made it possible for Yamaha engineers to bring you this same

sound in your own listening room, so you’ll feel all the sound of

a live concert.

Furthermore, our technicians, armed with sophisticated

measuring equipment, have even made it possible to capture

the acoustics of a variety of actual concert halls, jazz clubs,

theaters, etc. from around the world, to allow you to accurately

recreate any one of these live performance environments, all in

your own home.

Dolby Pro Logic Surround

This unit employs a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder similar

to professional Dolby Stereo decoders used in many movie

theaters. By using the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you

can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby

Stereo theater sound in your own home.

Dolby Pro Logic employs a four-channel-five-speaker system.

The Pro Logic Surround system divides the input signal into

four levels: the left and right main channels, the center channel

(used for dialog), and the rear surround sound channel (used

for sound effects, background noise, and other ambient

noises). The center channel allows listeners seated in even

less-than-ideal positions to hear the dialog originating from the

action on the screen while experiencing good stereo imaging.

Dolby Surround is encoded on a lot of sound tracks of pre-

recorded video tapes, laserdiscs, and some TV/cable

broadcasts. When you play a source encoded with Dolby

Surround on this unit, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder

decodes the signal and distributes the surround-sound effects.

Dolby Digital (AC-3)

Dolby Digital (AC-3) is a new generation of Dolby Surround

sound system which is a spatial sound processing format

developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing low bit-rate

audio coding.

Dolby Digital (AC-3) is a digital surround sound system that

provides completely independent multi-channel audio to

consumers. In multi-channel form, Dolby Digital (AC-3)

provides five full range channels in what is sometimes referred

to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left, center and

right), plus two surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect

channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency

effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other

channels. (This is called the “subwoofer channel” or “LFE

channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to

the term 5.1 channels in total.

Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system

(left front, center, right front and just one surround channel),

Dolby Digital (AC-3) features two surround channels, called

stereo or split surrounds, each offering the same full range

fidelity as the three front channels.

By using the built-in Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder, you can

experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo

Digital theater sound in your own home.

Sound of wide dynamic range reproduced by the five full range

channels presents listeners much excitement that has never

been experienced before. Precise sound orientation by the

discrete digital sound processing expands realism that the

original movie possesses.

The DTS (Digital Theater Systems) system was developed to

replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete

channels of digital soundtracks, and now, it is installed in many

theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system

changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six

discrete channels of superb digital audio.

The DTS technology, through intense research and

development, made it possible to deliver a similar

encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surround-

sound entertainment.

The DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which

delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically

5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and

two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as

“0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that

are currently available for home theater systems

The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the

six channels of 20-bit audio onto any laserdisc or compact disc

(or DVD in the near future) with considerably less data-

compression.

By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can

experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS

installed theater’s high quality sound in your own home.

Laserdisc and compact disc (and DVD in the near future) are

home audio format within which DTS can represent its high

quality multi-channel audio. (In addition to movies on

laserdiscs, many exciting new multi-channel music recordings

will also become available in the form of DTS-encoded

compact discs.)

Manufactured under license from DTS Technology LLC.

Additionally licensed under the following US Patent 5,451,942

& National Patent applications derived from PCT/US95/00959.

Additional U.S. and Foreign Patents pending. “DTS”, “digital

surround”, and “coherent acoustics” logos are trademarks of

Dolby Digital (AC-3) forms 5.1 channels as mentioned on the

previous page, and moreover, it can also form fewer channels,

for example 2 channel stereo and monaural. You may be able

to find some 2 channel stereo and/or monaural sources

encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in a market.

If a 2 channel stereo source encoded with the Dolby Digital

(AC-3) is played back as the input source and the DSP

program No. 10, 11 or 12 is used at the same time, the source

is first decoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder into 2

channels, and then decoded with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder.

In such a case, only the decoding of Dolby Pro Logic is shown

on the display panel of this unit.

Laserdisc and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit

from Dolby Digital (AC-3). In the near future, Dolby Digital (AC-

3) will also be applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing

release of Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway

will provide an immediate source of Dolby Digital (AC-3)

encoded video software.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing

Corporation.

DTS Digital Surround

English

Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and

the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround-

decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide

acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the

room, letting you feel much presence as if you were

watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater.

This combination is available when the digital sound field

program No. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or “PRO LOGIC/Enhanced” of

No. 12 is selected, and the input signal of source is analog,

PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in 2-

channels.

Dolby Digital (AC-3) or DTS + 3 Digital Sound

Fields

Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and

the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby

Digital (AC-3)-decoded or the DTS-decoded sound field

respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and

much surround effect in the room without losing high

channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby

Digital (AC-3) or DTS sound, this sound field combination

lets you feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest

Dolby Stereo Digital theater or DTS installed theater. This

will be the most ideal home theater sound at the present

time.

This combination is available when the digital sound field

program No. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or “DOLBY DIGITAL (or DTS

DIGITAL SUR.)/Enhanced” of No. 12 is selected, and the

input signal of source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-

3) (except in 2-channels) or encoded with the DTS.

CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP

Dolby Surround sound system and DTS system show their full

ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are

originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater

using many speakers. It is difficult to create a sound

environment similar to that of a movie theater in your listening

room, because the room size, materials of inside walls, the

number of speakers, etc. of your listening room are much

different from those of a movie theater.

Yamaha DSP technology made it possible to present you with

nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie

theater in your listening room by compensating for lack of

presence and dynamics in your listening room with its original

digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround sound or

DTS Digital Surround sound.

The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs

are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP technology

and Dolby Surround or DTS.

CINEMA DSP

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound field

quality with a full seven-speaker system setup, using a pair of

main speakers to output main source sounds, two extra pairs

of effect speakers to generate the sound field plus one center

speaker for dialog. We therefore recommend that you use a

seven-speaker setup. A four-speaker system using only one

pair of effect speakers for the sound field will still provide

impressive ambience and effects, however, and may be a

good way to begin with this unit. You can always upgrade to

the full seven-speaker system later. In the 4 or 5 speaker

system, the Digital Sound Field Processing is still performed,

but the main speakers are used for both the main channels

and the front effect channels.

Use of the Center Dialog Speaker Is

Recommended

When playing back a source with the Dolby Pro Logic

decoded, or playing back a source which contains center-

channel signals with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS

decoded, dialog, vocals etc. are output from the center

channel. Therefore, if you want to maximize the performance

of your Audio/Video home theater system, it is recommended

that you use a center channel speaker.

If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, it

is possible to enjoy movie viewing without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system.

Use of a Subwoofer Expands Your Sound

Field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer

is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any

or all channels, but also for reproducing signals at the

subwoofer channel with high fidelity during playing back a

source with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS decoded. You

may wish to choose the convenience of a Yamaha Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, which has its own built-

in power amplifier.

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers and Speaker Placement

Your full seven-speaker system will require three speaker

pairs: the MAIN SPEAKERS (your normal stereo speakers),

the FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS and the REAR SPEAKERS,

plus the CENTER SPEAKER. You may also be using a

SUBWOOFER.

The MAIN SPEAKERS should be high performance models

and have enough power handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system.

Other speakers do not have to be equal to the MAIN

SPEAKERS. For precise sound localization, however, it is

ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce

sounds in full range for the CENTER SPEAKER, the FRONT

EFFECT and REAR SPEAKERS.

Place the MAIN SPEAKERS in the normal position.

Place the FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS further apart than the

MAIN SPEAKERS, on either side of and 0.5–1m behind and

above the MAIN SPEAKER pair.

Place the REAR SPEAKERS behind your listening position.

They should be nearly 1.8m up from the floor.

Place the CENTER SPEAKER precisely between the two

MAIN SPEAKERS. (To avoid interference, keep the speaker

above or below the television monitor, or use a magnetically

shielded speaker.)

If using a SUBWOOFER, such as a Yamaha Active Servo

Subwoofer System, the position of the speaker is not so critical

because low bass tones are not highly directional.

Setting Up Your Speaker System

Main speaker

Front effect speaker

Center speaker

Rear speaker

Subwoofer

English

4 Speaker System

Simplest system.

You can enjoy widely diffused sound by only adding two

additional speaker units at the rear.

1E. FRONT MIX—Set to ON-5ch. (See page 27.)

1A. CENTER SP—Set to NONE. (See page 26.)

6 Speaker System

Good for sound fields from 2-channel stereo sources.

When a normal stereo source is played back with the sound

field programs No. 1 through No. 6, a sound effect matching

that of a 7-speaker system can be obtained. The addition of

front left and right effect speakers produces a more effective

sound field.

1E. FRONT MIX—Set to OFF-7ch. (See page 27.)

1A. CENTER SP—Set to NONE. (See page 26.)

5 Speaker System

Good for Audio/Video sources.

By the use of center speaker, center sounds (dialog, vocals

etc.) are precisely localized.

1E. FRONT MIX—Set to ON-5ch. (See page 27.)

1A. CENTER SP—Set to LRG or SML. (See page 26.)

7 Speaker System

This is the recommended speaker system, providing the

best sound effects.

The rear speakers and the front effect speakers produces a

360-degree sound field, and the center speaker provides

precise center localization.

You can experience the amazing YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP”

sound fields completely with the 7 speaker system.

1E. FRONT MIX—Set to OFF-7ch. (See page 27.)

1A. CENTER SP—Set to LRG or SML. (See page 26.)

Four Possible Types of Speaker System Configurations Recommended

CONNECTIONS

Never plug in this unit and other components until all connections are completed.

When making connections between this unit and other components, be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left)

to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also, refer to the owner’s manual for each component to be connected to this unit.

CONNECTING AUDIO/VIDEO SOURCE EQUIPMENT TO THIS UNIT

For connections with audio/video units, use RCA type pin plug cables with the exception described later.

* If you have YAMAHA audio/video units numbered as 1, 2, 3, etc. on the rear panel, connections can be made easily only by

connecting the output (or input) terminals of each unit to the same-numbered terminals of this unit.

MAIN

FRONT

VIDEO S VIDEO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

DVD/

VCR 3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/VCR 3 OUT

CAN BE USED AS A SECOND

MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED

BY SET MENU.

VIDEO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNAL

GND

PHONO

TUNER

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

PLAY

REC

TAPE 2

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

DIGITAL SIGNAL

PAL NTSC

OUTPUT

GND

OUTPUT

LINE OUT

LINE IN

LINE OUT

LINE IN

DIGITAL

(AC-3) RF SIGNAL

(General model)

Tuner

Turntable

MD recorder,

Tape deck 1, etc.

CD player

Tape deck 2

BASIC CONNECTIONS (for Audio Units)

GND terminal (For turntable use)

Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND

terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases

better results may be obtained with the ground wire

disconnected.

English

(General model)

LD player

Monitor TV

BASIC CONNECTIONS (for Video Units)

Video cassette recorder 2

DVD player or

video cassette recorder 3

MAIN

FRONT

VIDEO S VIDEO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

DVD/

VCR 3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/VCR 3 OUT

CAN BE USED AS A SECOND

MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED

BY SET MENU.

VIDEO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNAL

GND

PHONO

TUNER

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

PLAY

REC

TAPE 2

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

(AC-3) RF SIGNAL

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

DIGITAL SIGNAL

PAL NTSC

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT

Video cassette recorder 1

TV/Satellite tuner

PAL/NTSC switch (China and General models

only)

This unit is designed for use with the NTSC and PAL

television formats. Set this switch to the position for the

format your monitor TV employs.

PAL: Outputs signals in the PAL format no matter which

format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from

an external video unit to this unit.

Set to this position if your monitor TV employs the

PAL format.

NTSC: Outputs signals in the NTSC format no matter

which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent

from an external video unit to this unit.

Set to this position if your monitor TV employs the

NTSC format.

Note

Be sure to input a video signal which employs the same

format that your monitor TV employs, otherwise a picture

will not be played back normally.

For connecting with a monitor TV that uses a 21 pin

connector for input (for Europe and U.K. models)

Make a connection as figured below with a commercially

available scart-plug connector cable.

VCR 2

OUT

DVD/

VCR 3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/VCR 3 OUT

CAN BE USED AS A SECOND

MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED

BY SET MENU.

PLAY

REC

TAPE 2

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

DIGITAL SIGNAL

VIDEO

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

Monitor TV

No connection

Scart-plug connector cable

Note

If you wish to connect a second monitor TV (or a projector) to this

unit, you can switch the DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO OUT terminal (and S

VIDEO terminal also) to a second monitor out terminal for the

connection with another monitor TV. (Refer to page 38.)

VCR 2

OUT

DVD/

VCR 3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/VCR 3 OUT

CAN BE USED AS A SECOND

MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED

BY SET MENU.

PLAY

REC

TAPE 2

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

DIGITAL SIGNAL

AUDIO OUT

S-VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO IN

VIDEO IN

DVD player, etc.

Projector

English

m Connecting to VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel)

These terminals are used to connect any video input source such as a camcorder to this unit.

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO OUT

S VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT L

AUDIO OUT R

Camcorder

m Connecting to digital (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) terminals

If your CD player, MD recorder, LD player, DVD player,

TV/satellite tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical

digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to

this unit’s COAXIAL and/or OPTICAL digital signal input

terminals.

To make a connection between optical digital audio signal

terminals, remove the cover from each terminal, and then

connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber

cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not

function correctly.

Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the OPTICAL (or

COAXIAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit

connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals

of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape

deck or VCR connected to only analog audio signal terminals

of this unit. You can switch the selection of input signals

between “digital” and “analog” easily. (See page 41 for details.)

* However, if you connect an MD recorder or DAT to this

unit’s OPTICAL MD/TAPE 1 PLAY and REC terminals, it

can record input sources connected to this unit’s OPTICAL

digital signal input terminals.

Notes

●

When you connect an audio/video unit to both of the digital

and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to

both terminals of the same name.

●

Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals

are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from

dust.

●

All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the

sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.

●

In order to make this unit perform a successful DTS-

decoding, the DTS bitstream must not be altered,

manipulated or corrupted in the process that it is sent from

the DIGITAL OUT terminal of a unit playing back a source

encoded with the DTS to a digital signal input terminal of

this unit.

MAIN

FRONT

VIDEO S VIDEO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

DVD/

VCR 3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/VCR 3 OUT

CAN BE USED AS A SECOND

MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED

BY SET MENU.

VIDEO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNAL

GND

PHONO

TUNER

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

PLAY

REC

TAPE 2

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

DIGITAL SIGNAL

PAL NTSC

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

OUT

DIGITAL

(AC-3) RF SIGNAL

DVD player, etc.

MD recorder,

DAT, etc.

CD player

TV/Satellite tuner LD player

(General model)

English

If your LD player has a DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF signal

output terminal, connect it to this unit’s DIGITAL (AC-3) RF

SIGNAL input terminal. Audio signals encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) are input to this unit by this connection.

* To play back an LD source with the Dolby Digital decoded,

set the input mode of LD to “AUTO” or “AC-3 RF”. (Refer to

page 41 for details.)

It is also necessary to connect the LD player to this unit’s

OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and/or analog

audio signal input terminals regardless of the DOLBY DIGITAL

(AC-3) RF signal connection, for playing back an LD source

with the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or the DTS decoded, or in

normal stereo (or monaural).

Note

DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF audio input signal cannot be

recorded by a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR. To record an

LD source, the LD player must be connected to the OPTICAL

digital audio signal input terminal and/or analog audio signal

input terminals of this unit.

m Connecting to DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF output of the LD player

MAIN

FRONT

VIDEO S VIDEO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

DVD/

VCR 3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/VCR 3 OUT

CAN BE USED AS A SECOND

MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED

BY SET MENU.

VIDEO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNAL

GND

PHONO

TUNER

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

PLAY

REC

TAPE 2

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

DIGITAL SIGNAL

PAL NTSC

DIGITAL OUT

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO OUT

DOLBY DIGITAL

(AC-3) RF

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

(AC-3) RF SIGNAL

LD player

(General model)

VIDEO S VIDEO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

DVD/

VCR 3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/VCR 3 OUT

CAN BE USED AS A SECOND

MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED

BY SET MENU.

VIDEO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNAL

S-VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN

S-VIDEO IN

VIDEO IN

S-VIDEO IN

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO IN

VIDEO IN

VIDEO OUT

S-VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN

S-VIDEO IN

m Connecting to S VIDEO terminals

If your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. and your

monitor are equipped with “S” (high-resolution) video terminals,

connect them to this unit’s S VIDEO terminals, and connect

this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the “S” video

input of your monitor. Otherwise, connect the composite video

terminals from your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. to

the VIDEO terminals of this unit, and connect this unit’s VIDEO

MONITOR OUT terminal to the composite video input of your

monitor.

Note

If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and VIDEO

input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective

output terminals.

Notes about the Video superimpose

●

If you watch a video source that is connected to both S

VIDEO and VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of

screen display information are output from only the S

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal.

●

When no video signal is input to either S VIDEO or VIDEO

input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display

information are output from both S VIDEO MONITOR OUT

and VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals with a color

background.

* For China and General models, if the PAL/NTSC switch

on the rear panel is set to “PAL”, nothing will be output

from either S VIDEO MONITOR OUT or VIDEO

MONITOR OUT terminal in this case.

LD player

DVD player or video

cassette recorder 3

TV/Satellite tuner

Video cassette recorder 1

Video cassette recorder 2

Monitor TV

English

This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal

input terminals (for left main, right main, center, left rear

surround, right rear surround and subwoofer channels)

available for inputting signals from your existing amplifier,

sound processor, decoder, etc. to this unit.

To listen to a sound by reproducing signals input to these

terminals, press the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button on

the front panel once or more so that “EXT. DECODER IN”

appears on the display. By doing so, the signals input to these

terminals are sent to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals

and OUTPUT terminals of this unit.

Note

When signals input to these terminals are selected, the digital

sound field processor cannot be used.

m Connecting an external sound processor, decoder, amplifier, etc. to this unit

MAIN

FRONT

VIDEO S VIDEO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

OUT

DVD/

VCR 3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD/VCR 3 OUT

CAN BE USED AS A SECOND

MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED

BY SET MENU.

VIDEO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNALAUDIO SIGNAL

GND

PHONO

TUNER

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

PLAY

REC

TAPE 2

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT

MAIN

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PLAY

REC

MD/TAPE 1

TV/DBS

DVD/

VCR 3

DIGITAL SIGNAL

PAL NTSC

SUBWOOFER OUT

SURROUND OUT

CENTER OUT

MAIN OUT

DIGITAL

(AC-3) RF SIGNAL

External sound processor,

decoder, amplifier, etc.

(General model)

CONNECTING SPEAKERS

SPEAKERS

CAUTION

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING.

MAIN

FRONT

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND)

A B

A OR B

PRE

OUT

MAIN

MAIN CH CENTER SUBWOOFER

OUT MONO

OUT IN

FRONT REAR

(SURROUND)

SPLIT

COUPLER

Center speaker

Front effect speakers

Left

Right

Left

Right

Main speakers

Rear speakers

Subwoofer system

Left

Right

Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the

rear of this unit.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

➀

Unscrew the knob.

➁

Insert the bare wire.

[Remove approx. 5mm

(1/4”) insulation from

the speaker wires.]

➂

Tighten the knob and

secure the wire.

<U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models

only

Banana Plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the

Banana Plug connector into the corresponding terminal.

How to Connect:

Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with wire of the proper gauge, cut as short as possible. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct, that is the + and –

markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.

Caution

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or

speakers.

English

Note on center speaker connection:

One or two center speakers can be connected to this unit. If

you cannot place the center speaker on or under the TV, it is

recommended to use two center speakers and place them on

both sides of the TV to orient the center sound at the center

position. When using one center speaker, connect it to either

the A or B terminals and set the CENTER SPEAKERS switch

to “A OR B” (bottom position). When using two center

speakers, connect them to the A and B terminals, and set the

switch to “A + B” (top position).

If, however, you will not use a center speaker, be sure to set

the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode in the

“NONE” position. (See page 26.)

Note on a subwoofer connection:

You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies

or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel when

reproducing discrete signals.

When using one subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER

MONO terminal of this unit to the INPUT terminal of the

subwoofer amplifier, and connect the speaker terminals of the

subwoofer amplifier to the subwoofer.

If you wish to obtain more presence in your listening room, the

use of two subwoofers is recommended. To connect two

subwoofers to this unit, connect one SUBWOOFER SPLIT

terminal to the INPUT terminal of the amplifier driving a

subwoofer, and the other SUBWOOFER SPLIT terminal to the

INPUT terminal of the amplifier driving the other subwoofer,

and then connect each subwoofer to the corresponding

amplifier.

With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo

Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer

are in the same unit.

(Refer to page 21 for details about the SUBWOOFER

MONO/SPLIT terminals.)

CENTER SPEAKERS

switch

Subwoofer

system

Subwoofer

system

Subwoofer

system

Center

speaker

Center

speaker

PRE

OUT

MAIN

MAIN CH CENTER SUBWOOFER

OUT MONO

OUT IN

FRONT REAR

(SURROUND)

SPLIT

COUPLER

PRE

OUT

MAIN

MAIN CH CENTER SUBWOOFER

OUT MONO

OUT IN

FRONT REAR

(SURROUND)

SPLIT

COUPLER

SPEAKERS

CAUTION

SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING.

MAIN

FRONT

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND)

A B

A OR B

Be sure to switch this only when the power to this unit is not on.

Select the position whose requirements your speaker system

meets.

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this

unit may be damaged.

IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE

STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED;

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to

either end closely. If so, set the switch to either end closely.

(Left position)

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or

higher.

Center: If you use two center speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

If you use one center speaker, the impedance of the

speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

Main: The impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or

higher.

Front effect:

The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or

higher.

(Right position)

Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or

higher.

Center: If you use two center speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4Ω or higher.

If you use one center speaker, the impedance of the

speaker must be 8Ω or higher.

Main: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or

higher.

Front effect:

The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or

higher.

m IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

I00W MAX. TOTAL

200W MAX.

UNSWITCHED

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

EFFECT : 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

FRONT

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B : 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

EFFECT : 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

FRONT

A B

A OR B

FRONT REAR

(SURROUND)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model)

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

English

The speaker connections described on page 18 are fine for

most applications. If for some reason, however, you wish to

drive main, center, front effect and/or rear speakers with your

existing amplifier, etc., the following terminals are available for

connecting external amplifier(s) to this unit.

1 MAIN CH PRE OUT/MAIN IN terminals

The PRE OUT terminals are for main channel line output,

and the MAIN IN terminals are for line input to the built-in

main channel amplifier. The PRE OUT and MAIN IN

terminals must be connected with jumper bars when the

built-in amplifier is used.

However, if you drive main speakers with an external

stereo power amplifier, first remove the jumper bars, and

then connect the input terminals of the external amplifier

(MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver)

to the PRE OUT terminals. No connection is needed to

the MAIN IN terminals.

* Output signals from the PRE OUT terminals are

affected by the use of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE

controls and BASS EXTENSION switch.

2 CENTER OUT/IN terminals

The CENTER OUT terminals are for center channel line

output, and the CENTER IN terminal is for line input to the

built-in center channel amplifier.

The lower side of CENTER OUT terminals and the

CENTER IN terminal must be connected with a jumper

bar when the built-in amplifier is used.

However, if you drive one or two center speakers with an

external power amplifier (for each), first remove the

jumper bar, and then connect the input terminal(s) of the

external amplifier(s) to either or both CENTER OUT

terminals. No connection is needed to the CENTER IN

terminal.

3 SUBWOOFER terminals

SUBWOOFER MONO terminal

When using a subwoofer, connect its amplifier input to

this terminal. Frequencies below 90 Hz distributed from

the main, center and/or rear channels are output from this

terminal. Signals of LFE (low frequency effect) generated

when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded are

also output if they are assigned to this terminal.

SUBWOOFER SPLIT terminals

When using two subwoofers, connect their amplifier

inputs to these terminals. Low bass signals that are

output from the SUBWOOFER MONO terminal are also

output from these terminals. However, signals from the

left main and left rear channels are output to the SPLIT L

terminal, and signals from the right main and right rear

channels are to the SPLIT R terminal separately.

4 FRONT terminals

These terminals are for front effect channel line output.

There is no connection to these terminals when you use

the built-in amplifier.

However, if you drive front effect speakers with an

external stereo power amplifier, connect the input

terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX

terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals.

5 REAR (SURROUND) terminals

These terminals are for rear channel line output. There is

no connection to these terminals when you use the built-

in amplifier.

However, if you drive rear speakers with an external

stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the

external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an

amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals.

Notes

•

Output level of signals from all of these terminals are

adjusted by the use of VOLUME control on the front panel

or MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote control

transmitter.

•

If an external power amplifier is connected to the FRONT

or REAR output terminals, the corresponding internal

amplifier will be turned off and no output will be available

at the SPEAKERS terminals.

m To drive main, center, front effect and/or rear speakers with external amplifiers

PRE

OUT

MAIN

MAIN CH CENTER SUBWOOFER

OUT MONO

OUT IN

FRONT REAR

(SURROUND)

SPLIT

COUPLER

12345

•

After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord

into a convenient AC outlet.

•

Unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet if this unit is

not to be used for a long period of time.

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

I00W MAX. TOTAL

200W MAX.

UNSWITCHED

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

EFFECT : 6

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

FRONT

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A B : 4

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

A OR B : 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

: 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

EFFECT : 8

Ω

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

FRONT

A B

A OR B

FRONT REAR

(SURROUND)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

To AC outlet

(General model)

PLUGGING IN THIS UNIT

AC OUTLET(S)

(U.S.A., Canada, China and General models)

.......................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

1 UNSWITCHED OUTLET

(Europe, U.K. and Australia models)

............................................................. 1 SWITCHED OUTLET

Use these to connect the power cords from your components

to this unit.

The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s

STANDBY/ON switch or the provided remote control

transmitter’s SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys.

These outlets will supply power to any connected unit

whenever this unit is turned on.

The maximum power (total power consumption of components)

that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is as

follows.

●

U.S.A. model: 120W

●

Except U.S.A. model: 100W

The power to the UNSWITCHED outlet is not controlled by this

unit’s STANDBY/ON switch or the provided remote control

transmitter’s SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys. This

outlet will supply power to the connected unit even if this unit is

in the standby mode.

The maximum power (total power consumption of components)

that can be connected to the UNSWITCHED AC OUTLET is as

follows.

●

U.S.A. and Canada models: 180W

●

China and General models: 200W

Voltage Selector (China and General Models

only)

The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be

set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the

AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

English

CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

FRONT PANEL

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

B DCE9 F0G

23 456

7 8A

1 STANDBY/ON switch

Press this switch to turn the power to this unit on. Press it

again to turn this unit into the standby mode.

* When you press this switch to turn the power on, you will

hear a click and a sound of the built-in fan rotating for a

moment.

Standby mode

In this state, this unit consumes a very small quantity of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control

transmitter.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control transmitter.

3 Display panel

Shows various information. (For details, refer to page 25.)

4 TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button

When this button is pressed once or more so that “TAPE2

MONITOR ON” appears on the display, sound source played

on the unit connected to the TAPE 2 PLAY/REC AUDIO

SIGNAL terminals on the rear of this unit is selected as the

input source taking priority of the INPUT SELECTOR’s setting.

When this button is pressed once or more so that “EXT.

DECODER IN” appears on the display, sound signals input to

the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this

unit is selected as the input source taking priority of the INPUT

SELECTOR’s setting.

When this button is pressed once or more so that the display

returns to a normal display mode, the above input sources are

canceled.

5 INPUT SELECTOR

Selects the input source that you want to listen to (and watch).

The selected source is shown on the display.

6 Master VOLUME control

Simultaneously controls volume level at all outputs: front effect,

main, rear, center, and subwoofer. (This does not affect REC

OUT level.)

* When the volume is decreased by pressing the MUTE key

on the remote control transmitter, the indicator on the master

VOLUME control flashes on and off.

7 PHONES jack

Plug in headphones here for private listening. Sound signals

from the main channels only are output here. However, if the

Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded, signals at all

channels are distributed to the main channels and output here.

PHONES

BASS EXTENSION switch

When this switch is pressed inward (ON), boosts bass

frequency response at the main left and main right channels

while maintaining overall tonal balance. If you do not have a

subwoofer, the use of this switch will be effective to reinforce

the bass frequencies.

9 SET MENU –/+ button

Performs setting changes and adjustments for functions

selected by pressing the NEXT button.

NEXT button

Selects functions in the SET MENU mode whenever pressed.

0 BASS and TREBLE controls

Adjust low and high frequency response respectively for the left

main, right main and center channels only.

A PROGRAM selector button

Sequentially selects the digital sound field processing

programs in the or direction.

B BALANCE control

This control is effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

This control adjusts the balance of the output volume to the left

and right main speakers to compensate for sound imbalance

caused by speaker location or listening room conditions.

C EFFECT button

Switches on and off the output from the center, rear and front

effect speakers. When switched to off, the sound becomes

normal 2-channels.

* Even if the output from the center, rear and front effect

speakers is off, when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is

decoded, signals at all channels are distributed to the main

channels and output from the main speakers.

D REC OUT selector

Selects the source to be recorded to an MD recorder (or tape

deck 1) or VCR 1 independently of the setting of the INPUT

SELECTOR. However, when set to the SOURCE position, the

setting of the INPUT SELECTOR decides the source to be

recorded to an MD recorder (or tape deck) or VCR.

E INPUT MODE button

Switches the mode of selecting input signals between “AUTO”,

“DTS” and “ANALOG” modes for sources that input two or

more types of signals to this unit. (Refer to page 41 for details.)

* For LD source, this switches among “AUTO”, “AC-3 RF”,

“DTS”, “DIGITAL” and “ANALOG” modes.

F VIDEO AUX terminals

Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a

camcorder to these terminals. If the connected video unit has a

S video output terminal, connect it to the S VIDEO terminal to

obtain a high resolution picture. The source connected to these

terminals can be selected by the INPUT SELECTOR and REC

OUT selector.

G Control door

When it is not necessary to operate controls inside the control

door, close the door.

To open the door

To close the door

English

DISPLAY PANEL

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

2 31

546 78

1 indicators

When the built-in DTS decoder is on, either dts indicator lights

up. Red “dts” indicator lights up when playing a compact disc

or laserdisc encoded with the DTS. Orange “dts” indicator

lights up when playing a DVD encoded with the DTS.

* On a DVD/LD combi-player, if you play a laserdisc encoded

with the DTS after playing a Video-CD, DVD, etc., the

orange “dts” indicator may light up.

2 Multi-information display

Shows the currently selected DSP program, or information for

several adjustments or setting changes made on this unit.

3 Input source indicators

Show the currently selected input source by the arrow-shaped

cursor.

4 DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC indicators

“ DIGITAL” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital (AC-3)

Decoder is on and the signals of selected source encoded with

the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is not in 2-channels.

“ PRO LOGIC” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic

Surround Decoder is on.

5 DSP indicator

“DSP” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor

is on.

6 Digital audio input signal indicators

These indicators show the type of digital signal currently input

to this unit.

When PCM digital audio signals are input to this unit, “PCM”

lights up.

When digital audio signals encoded with the Dolby Digital

(AC-3) are input to this unit, “AC-3” lights up.

When digital audio signals encoded with the DTS are input to

this unit, “DTS” lights up.

7 SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is functioning.

8 TAPE 2 MON indicator

Lights up when the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) connected

to the TAPE 2 PLAY/REC AUDIO SIGNAL terminals on the

rear of this unit is selected as the input source by pressing the

TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button.

1A. CENTER SP

Choices: LARGE (LRG)/SMALL (SML)/NONE

Preset position: LRG

LRG: Select this position when your center speaker is

approximately the same size as the main speakers.

SML: Select this position when you use a center speaker

that is smaller than the main speakers. In this

position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the center

channel are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals

(or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected

on “1D. LFE/BASS OUT”).

NONE: Select this position when you do not have a center

speaker. The center channel sound will be output

from the left and right main speakers.

1B. REAR SP

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: Select this position if your rear speakers have a high

ability for bass reproduction, or a subwoofer is

connected to the rear speaker in parallel.

In this position, full range signals are output from the

rear speakers.

SMALL: Select this position if your rear speakers do not have

a high ability for bass reproduction.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position

is selected on “1D. LFE/BASS OUT”).

SELECTING THE OUTPUT MODES SUITABLE FOR YOUR SPEAKER

SYSTEM (IN THE “SET MENU” MODE)

This unit provides you with the following functions to distribute respective output signals to suitable speakers in your audio system.

When speaker connections are all completed, select a proper position on each function to make the best use of your speaker

system.

* For details about the SET MENU mode, refer to pages 32 to 38.

1. SPEAKER SET

1A. CENTER SP

1B. REAR SP

1C. MAIN SP

1D. LFE/BASS OUT

1E. FRONT MIX

1F. MAIN LEVEL

ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT

m DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION

English

1C. MAIN SP

Choices: LARGE/SMALL

Preset position: LARGE

LARGE: Select this position if your main speakers have a high

ability for bass reproduction.

In this position, full range signals present at the main

channels are output from the main speakers.

SMALL: Select this position if your main speakers do not have

a high ability for bass reproduction. However, if your

system does not include a subwoofer, do not select

this position.

In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the

main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals (if the SW or BOTH position is selected on

“1D. LFE/BASS OUT”).

1D. LFE/BASS OUT

Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH

Preset position: SW

MAIN: Select this position if your system does not include a

subwoofer.

In this position, full range signals present at the main

channels, signals from the LFE channel and other

low bass signals that are selected on “1A. CENTER

SP” to “1C. MAIN SP” to be distributed from other

channels are output from the main speakers.

SW/BOTH:

Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system

includes a subwoofer.

In either position, signals at LFE channel and other

low bass signals that are selected on “1A. CENTER

SP” to “1C. MAIN SP” to be distributed from other

channels are output from the SUBWOOFER

terminals.

When the LARGE position is selected on “1C. MAIN

SP”, in the SW position, no signal is distributed from

the main channels to the SUBWOOFER terminals,

however in the BOTH position, low bass signals from

the main channels are output to both of the main

speakers and the SUBWOOFER terminals.

1E. FRONT MIX

Choices: OFF-7ch/ON-5ch

Preset position: OFF-7ch

OFF-7ch:Select this position if your speaker system includes a

pair of front effect speakers.

ON-5ch: Select this position if your speaker system does not

include a pair of front effect speakers.

Sound signals at the left and right front effect

channels are distributed to the left and right main

channels respectively, and output from the main

speakers.

1F. MAIN LEVEL

Choices: Normal/–10dB

Preset position: Normal

Normal: Normally, select this position.

–10dB: Select this position if the volume levels to the center,

rear and/or front effect speakers are lower than the

level to the main speakers even though they are

adjusted to maximum.

The volume level to the main speakers are

decreased by 10 dB, so you can adjust the speaker

output level balance properly.

m METHOD OF CHANGING SELECTIONS

Operations should be made watching information on this unit’s display panel or the monitor screen.

If you will use the remote control transmitter, set the

PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU

position on the remote control transmitter.

Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the

lid open.

1 Turn the power to this unit on. (If you want to display

information on the monitor, turn the power to the monitor

on.)

2 Select the title “1. SPEAKER SET” by pressing the

button figured below once or more (so that the title

appears on the display).

4 Press “+” or “–” once or more so that the arrow-shaped

cursor points the position you will select.

5 In the same way, select a proper position on “1B.

REAR SP”, “1C. MAIN SP”, “1D. LFE/BASS OUT”, “1E.

FRONT MIX” and/or “1F. MAIN LEVEL”.

First select the title of function by following step 2, and

then select a proper position by following step 4.

Front panel

Press once.

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

STANDBY/ON

NEXTSET MENU

PARAMETER

SET MENU

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

Front panel

Remote control

NEXTSET MENU

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

EFFECT

ON/OFF

VIDEO 1

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2 THEATER

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

DTS

SURROUND

3, 4

2, 3, 4

PARAMETER/SET MENU

Remote control

SYSTEM

POWER ON

Cursor

English

Set to the “

∞

” position.

2 Turn the power on.

Set to the “0” position.

Set to the “OFF ( )”.

5 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch on the

remote control transmitter to the PARAMETER

position.

6 Press the TEST key on the remote control transmitter

so that “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the display to

enter test mode.

This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center rear and front effect speakers using the

built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the

same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital (AC-3)

decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder and the DTS decoder.

The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote control transmitter.

Otherwise, the result may not be satisfactory.

Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the lid open.

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

VOLUME

–dB

STANDBY/ON

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

BASS

EXTENSION

OFF

4 3

TAPE 2 MON

/ EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

V-AUX

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

123

CLUB

ENTER-

TAINMENT

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

456

HALL 1 HALL 2

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

DTS

SURROUND

SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

TEST

Front panel

Remote control

SYSTEM

POWER ON

CONTINUED

PARAMETER

SET MENU

7 Turn up the volume.

You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main

speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main

speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear

speaker, for about 2.5 seconds each. The display changes

as shown below.

* The state of test tone output is also shown on the monitor

screen by an image of audio listening room. This is

convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

* If the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode

is set in the “NONE” position, you will hear the center

channel test tone from the left and right main speakers.

8 Adjust the BALANCE control so that the effect sound

output level of the left main speaker and the right main

speaker are the same.

9 Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker

and the rear speakers so that they become almost as

same as that of the main speakers.

How to adjust:

Pressing the + or – key adjusts the level to the speaker

(except the main speakers) currently outputting the test

tone.

* Pressing the + key raises and the – key lowers the

level.

* While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected

speaker.

If desired, you can select a speaker to output the test

tone by pressing the or key once or more so that

“CENTER”, “RIGHT SURROUND” or “LEFT

SURROUND” appears on the display.

* While holding the or key pressed, the test tone

is fixed on the selected speaker.

* “CENTER” shows the center speaker is selected,

“RIGHT SURROUND” shows the right rear speaker,

and “LEFT SURROUND” shows the left rear speaker.

* The output level of the selected speaker can be

adjusted by the + or – key.

MUTE

BALANCE

Main (L)

Main (R)

Center

Rear (L)

Rear (R)

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

TEST DOLBY SUR.

EFFECT LEVEL

CENTER 2dB

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

EFFECT

ON/OFF

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

DTS

SURROUND

English

10 For the front effect speaker level adjustment, press

the TEST key on the remote control transmitter

again so that “TEST DSP” appears on the display.

A calibration signal should be heard from the main

speakers and the front effect speakers in turn.

11 Adjust the front effect speaker level by pressing the

+ or – key so that it becomes almost as same as

that of the main speakers.

* While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the front

effect speaker.

* Pressing the or key makes the test tone fix

on the left front effect speaker and the right front

effect speaker respectively. This is helpful for you

to check that each speaker is correctly connected

to this unit.

12 When the adjustment is finished, press the TEST

key once again to cancel the test tone.

Notes

●

Once you have completed these adjustments, you can

adjust whole sound level on your audio system by using

the VOLUME control (or the MASTER VOLUME keys on

the remote control transmitter) only.

●

If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use

their volume controls to achieve proper balance.

●

If the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode

is set in the “NONE” position, in step 9, the sound output

level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is

because in this mode, the center sound is automatically

output from the left and right main speakers.

●

If there is insufficient sound output from the center and

rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker

output level by setting the function “1F. MAIN LEVEL” in

the SET MENU mode in the “–10dB” position.

Remote control

Disappears

TEST

Remote control

TEST

TAPE 2 MON

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

123

CLUB

ENTER-

TAINMENT

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

456

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

DTS

SURROUND

10, 12

Main

Front effect

Operations should be made watching information on this unit’s

display panel or the monitor screen. If you want to display

information on the monitor, turn on the power to the monitor.

The use of the remote control transmitter is recommended for

easier operation.

When using the remote control transmitter, set the

PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position

on the remote control transmitter.

Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the

lid open.

1 Press once or more until the title of function on which you

will make a change appears on the display.

2 Select any desired position or edit parameters on the

function.

3 Repeat step 1 and 2 to make a setting change or

adjustment on any other function.

Note

A detailed adjusting method by using the remote control

transmitter’s keys is described for each function on pages 33 to

38. When you make an adjustment on the front panel, note the

following.

●

+/– keys on the remote control transmitter are identical with

the SET MENU +/– button on the front panel.

●

key on the remote control transmitter is identical with the

NEXT button on the front panel.

In addition, note that the key on the remote control

transmitter can be used to change selections in the order

reverse to the key.

ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE

1. SPEAKER SET

1A. CENTER SP

1B. REAR SP

1C. MAIN SP

1D. LFE/BASS OUT

1E. FRONT MIX

1F. MAIN LEVEL

2. LOW FREQ. TEST

3. DLBY DGTL SET

3A. LFE LEVEL

3B. D-RANGE

4. DTS SET

4A. LFE LEVEL

5. CENTER DELAY

6. CENTER GEQ

07. CINEMA EQ

08. PARAMETER INI

09. MEMORY GUARD

10. VCR3 VIDEO

11. INPUT MODE

12. DIMMER

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

NEXTSET MENU

PARAMETER

SET MENU

m METHOD OF SETTING CHANGE AND ADJUSTMENT

The following twelve types of functions maximize the performance of your system and expand your enjoyment for audio listening and

video watching.

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

EFFECT

ON/OFF

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

DTS

SURROUND

1, 2

PARAMETER/SET MENU

English

1. SPEAKER SET (Selecting the output modes suitable for your speaker system)

Refer to pages 26 to 28 for details. (Once you have selected proper modes, you do not have to make a setting change until any

alteration is made in your speaker system.)

2. LOW FREQ. TEST (Adjusting subwoofer level by using the test tone)

m DESCRIPTIONS OF THE FUNCTIONS

The internal low frequency test tone generator is useful for

adjusting subwoofer level to make the subwoofer sound match

the sound of other speakers in your audio system.

Operating procedure

1. After selecting this function (title) in step 1 on page 32,

press the + or – key to display the mode for adjustment.

2. Press the key so that the arrow points to

“TEST TONE

. . . .

OFF”. Next press the + or – key to

switch to the “ON” position.

The test tone is heard from the selected speaker(s).

3. Press the key so that the arrow points to

“OUTPUT

. . . .

”. Next press the + or – key to select the

speaker whose sound you want to compare with the

subwoofer sound. The test tone is output from the selected

speaker.

* Adjust the MASTER VOLUME keys so that the test tone

can be heard at your desired listening level.

* If “SUBWOOFER” is selected, the test tone below 90 Hz

is output from the subwoofer.

* The test tone will not be necessarily output from only the

selected speaker(s). The output mode of the test tone

depends on the settings on “1. SPEAKER SET” in the

SET MENU mode.

* Even if a source is being played back, the test tone is

output instead of the source sounds.

4. Press the key so that the arrow points to

“FREQ.

. . . . . . .

88 Hz”. To confirm that the subwoofer

sound matches the sound of other speakers, change the

frequency of test tone one by one by pressing the + or –

key. (Frequency can be changed from 35 Hz to 250 Hz,

and last, all range (35–250 Hz) of frequencies are output.)

Adjust subwoofer level with the control on the

subwoofer so that the subwoofer sound matches the

sound of other speakers in any range of low frequencies.

Note

This low frequency test tone can also be applied to check the

bass response in your room. For the best bass condition, bass

sound must be heard definitely at any position in your room. If

not, change the setting of subwoofer or furniture in your room.

3. DLBY DGTL (DOLBY DIGITAL) SET

Adjusting method

After selecting the title “3. DLBY DGTL SET” in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key to display the title “3A. LFE LEVEL”. To

select the title “3B. D-RANGE”, press the

key. (To select the title

“3A. LFE LEVEL” again, press the key.) Then make a

setting change or adjustment with the + or – key.

3A. LFE LEVEL (Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel)

●

Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB

Preset value: 0 dB

●

This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital

(AC-3) is decoded and the signals of selected source

encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) contain LFE signals.

Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect)

channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals at other

channels to output them from the same speakers, the ratio of

LFE signal level to the level of other signals are adjusted. (Refer

to page 5 for details about the LFE channel.)

●

Choices: MAX/STD/MIN

Preset position: MAX

●

This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital

(AC-3) is decoded.

MAX: “Dynamic range” is the difference between the

maximum level and the minimum level of sounds.

Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie

theaters feature very wide dynamic range.

Dolby Digital (AC-3) technology can bring the original

sound track into a home audio format with this wide

dynamic range unchanged.

In this position, a source encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) is reproduced in the original sound

track’s wide dynamic range providing you with

powerful sounds like a movie theater.

Selecting this position will be more ideal if you can

listen to a source in a high output level in a room

specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment.

STD (Standard):

Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range

are not always suitable for home use. Depending

upon the condition of your listening environment, it

may not be possible to increase the sound output

level as high as a movie theater. However, in a level

suitable for listening in your room, the low level parts

of source sound cannot be heard well because they

will be lost among noises in your environment.

Dolby Digital (AC-3) technology also made it

possible to reduce an original sound track’s dynamic

range for a home audio format by “compressing” the

data of sound.

In this position, a source encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) is reproduced in the “compressed”

dynamic range of the source suitable for low level

listening.

If you desire, you can adjust the dynamic range

manually only when the STD position is selected.

m H-LEVEL CUT (High Level Cut Scale)

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

Preset value: 1.0

Adjusts the dynamic range of high level signals of

source. The larger the value, the more the range is

reduced. The smaller the value, the range is more

widened.

m L-LEVEL BST (Low Level Boost Scale)

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

Preset value: 1.0

Adjusts the dynamic range of low level signals of

source. The larger the value, the more the range is

widened. The smaller the value, the range is more

reduced.

Adjusting method

Select the title H-LEVEL CUT or L-LEVEL BST by

pressing the or key and adjust its value by

pressing the + or – key.

MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than

in the STD position. Selecting this position will be

effective when you must listen to a source in

extremely low level.

* In this position, it may happen that sound is output

faintly or not output normally depending on a

source. In that case, select the MAX or STD

position.

3B. D-RANGE (Adjusting dynamic range)

4. DTS SET

Adjusting method

After selecting the title “4. DTS SET” in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key to display the title “4A. LFE LEVEL”. Then adjust its

level with the + or – key.

4A. LFE LEVEL (Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel)

●

Control range: –10 dB to 10 dB

Preset value: 0 dB

●

This adjustment is effective only when the DTS is decoded

and the signals of selected source encoded with the DTS

contain LFE signals.

Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect)

channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals at other

channels to output them from the same speakers, the ratio of

LFE signal level to the level of other signals is adjusted. (Refer to

page 6 for details about the LFE channel.)

English

5. CENTER DELAY (Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.))

●

Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step)

Preset value: 0 ms

●

This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital

(AC-3) or the DTS is decoded and the signals of selected

source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS

contain center channel signals.

Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main

channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel).

The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated.

In your audio system, the distance from the center speaker to

your listening position may be shorter than the distance from

the left or right main speaker to your listening position. In that

case, sounds from the left main, center and right main

speakers can reach your listening position at the same time by

delaying the sound from the center speaker.

6. CENTER GEQ (Adjusting the Center Channel Graphic Equalizer)

The built-in five band graphic equalizer is used to tailor, over a

±6 dB range, the overall output frequency response of the

center channel. The five bands cover the complete audible

sound spectrum and are centered on 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz,

3 kHz and 10 kHz frequencies. Adjustment should be done to

each frequency individually.

Adjusting method

After selecting the function (title) in step 1 on page 32, press

the + or – key to display the condition of the equalizer. Then

select a frequency with the or key and adjust its level

with the + or – key.

* Adjustment can be made by monitoring sounds using the

test tone. To use the test tone, press the TEST key so that

“TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the display before making

adjustment. The test tone is output from the center

speaker(s).

It is difficult to balance tonal quality of the main, center, front

effect and rear effect speakers, because they may be different

in type and size, and their setting positions and heights are

also different. The built-in CINEMA Equalizer enables you to

balance tonal quality of the speakers easily by adjusting tonal

quality of the main/center, front effect and rear effect channels

individually.

This is also useful to compensate for loss of tonal response of

the main and center speakers when these speakers are placed

behind the projection screen (if you use a projector in place of

a TV).

The CINEMA Equalizer consists of the High-shelving equalizer

(HIGH) and the Parametric equalizer (PEQ). The High-shelving

equalizer changes high frequency characteristics smoothly,

and the Parametric equalizer boosts or cuts any selected

frequency smoothly.

Adjusting method

1. After selecting this function (title) in step 1 on page 32,

press the + or – key.

2. Select the channels on which you will make adjustments by

pressing the or key so that the arrow points the

corresponding title.

L, C, R ............... Left main, center and right main channels

FRNT EFCT ....................................... Front effect channels

REAR EFCT ................................................ Rear channels

3. Press the + or – key to turn the equalizer for the selected

channels to “ON”.

4. Press the key repeatedly until the title of adjusting

mode (7A. L,C,R EQ/7B. FRNT EFCT EQ/7C. REAR

EFCT EQ) for the channels on which you will make

adjustments is displayed.

* The adjusting mode will not be displayed for the channels

that are set to “OFF” in step 2.

5. Make adjustments for the selected channels.

Select the item with the or key and change the

value with the + or – key.

HIGH: FRQ..................... Selects a turnover frequency of

the High-shelving equalizer.

GAIN ............................. Adjusts the maximum equalizing

level.

PEQ: FRQ...................... Selects a frequency you will

boost or cut.

GAIN .............................. Adjusts the equalizing level on

the selected frequency.

* Adjustment can be made by monitoring sounds using the

test tone. To use the test tone, press the TEST key so that

“TEST DOLBY SUR.” or “TEST DSP” appears on the

display. The test tone is fixed on the channels on which you

make an adjustment and output from the corresponding

speakers.

It is recommended to make these adjustments together with

the tonal quality adjustment of the center speaker on the

function “6. CENTER GEQ”.

Note

Excessive increase of the GAIN level may cause an overload.

It is recommended to adjust the GAIN level so that it becomes

lower than the preset value.

7. CINEMA EQ (Adjusting the tonal balance of speakers)

m Preset value of the CINEMA Equalizer

L, C, R EQ

HIGH: FRQ ..................... 12.7 kHz

GAIN .................................... –3 dB

PEQ: FRQ ....................... 12.7 kHz

GAIN .................................... –4 dB

FRONT, REAR EFCT EQ

HIGH: FRQ ..................... 12.7 kHz

GAIN ...................................... 0 dB

PEQ: FRQ ......................... 8.0 kHz

GAIN .................................... –3 dB

m Frequency characteristics

The following curves show frequency characteristics when the High-shelving equalizer (HIGH) is adjusted at the indicated values.

HIGH: FRQ ....................... 1.0 kHz

GAIN ..................... +6 dB to –9 dB

HIGH: FRQ .... 1.0 kHz to 12.7 kHz

GAIN ......................... +6 dB/–9 dB

GAIN (dB)

–

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

HIGH

PEQ

–

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

PEQ

HIGH

PEQ

(OVERALL)

Frequency (Hz)

GAIN (dB)

Frequency (Hz)

GAIN (dB)

–

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

Frequency (Hz)

GAIN (dB)

–

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

FREQ.

POINTS

1.0k

1.2k

1.6k

2.0k

2.5k

3.2k

4.0k

5.0k

5.7k

6.3k

7.1k

8.0k

9.0k

10.1k

11.3k

12.7kH

Frequency (Hz)

English

The following curves show frequency characteristics when the Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) is adjusted at the indicated values.

PEQ: FRQ ........................... 1.0 kHz

GAIN ........................ +6 dB to –9 dB

PEQ: FRQ ........ 1.0 kHz to 12.7 kHz

GAIN ............................ +6 dB/–9 dB

–

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

–

20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k

Frequency (Hz)

GAIN (dB)

Frequency (Hz)

GAIN (dB)

8. PARAMETER INI (Initializing parameters on a DSP program)

You can initialize all parameter settings on a DSP program.

Note that a DSP program has two or three subprograms; all

parameters on both subprograms are initialized by this

operation.

Initializing method

After selecting this function (title) in step 1 on page 32, press

the + or – key to display the DSP program numbers (1 – 12). A

program number whose parameters has been changed is

marked with “

”. Press a DSP program selector key

corresponding to the program number of which parameters

you want to initialize. When initialized, the “

” mark will

disappear.

9. MEMORY GUARD (Locking DSP parameters and other adjustments)

If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to DSP parameters

or other adjustments on this unit, select “ON”. In this position,

they are locked and cannot be changed. The following

functions on this unit can be locked by this operation.

• DSP parameters

• Other functions in the “SET MENU” mode

• ON SCREEN display key

• LEVEL key

• TEST key

FREQ.

POINTS

1.0k

1.2k

1.6k

2.0k

2.5k

3.2k

4.0k

5.0k

5.7k

6.3k

7.1k

8.0k

9.0k

10.1k

11.3k

12.7kH

11. INPUT MODE (Selecting the initial input mode of the sources connected to the

TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3 input terminals)

For the sources connected to the TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3

input terminals of this unit only, you can designate the input

mode that is automatically selected when the power of this unit

is switched on.

AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always

selected when the power of this unit is switched on.

LAST: In this position, the input mode you have selected the

last time is memorized and will not be changed even if

the power of this unit is switched on.

* Refer to page 41 for details about switching the input mode.

Operating method

After selecting this function (title) in step 1 on page 32, press

the + or – key. Next select the input source TV/DBS or

DVD/VCR 3 by pressing the or key so that the arrow

points to its name, and then select the AUTO or LAST mode

by pressing the + or – key.

12. DIMMER (Changing brightness of the display panel)

You can adjust brightness of the display panel in five degrees.

10. VCR 3 VIDEO (Switching the DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO OUT terminal to a second monitor out

terminal.)

If you wish to connect a second monitor TV (or a projector) to

this unit, select “MONTR” position. The DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO

OUT terminal (and S VIDEO terminal also) is switched to a

second monitor out terminal, so you can connect this terminal

to the video input terminal of another monitor TV.

Notes

• Even in the “MONTR” position, the DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO IN

terminal can be used as a normal video signal input terminal

and the DVD/VCR 3 AUDIO SIGNAL IN/OUT terminals as

normal audio input/output terminals.

• If using the DVD/VCR 3 terminals for connecting a third

video cassette recorder only, be sure to select “REC OUT”

position.

If the picture on the monitor is disturbed while the third

video cassette recorder is functionning, “MONTR” position

may be selected. If so, select “REC OUT” position.

English

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

Set to the “

∞

” position.

2 Turn the power on.

3 Select the desired input source.

(For video sources, turn the TV/monitor ON.)

The selected source is shown on the display panel and

the monitor screen.

Name of the selected input source

To select the tape deck connected to this unit’s TAPE 2

terminals or the source connected to this unit’s

EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals, refer to page

40.

4 For the source that inputs two or more types of signals to

this unit, its current input mode is also shown.

To change the input mode, press the INPUT MODE

button on the front panel or the input selector key for the

currently selected source on the remote control

transmitter. (Refer to page 41 for details on switching the

input mode.)

5 Play the source.

Adjust to the desired output level.

7 If desired, adjust the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE

controls, etc. (refer to page 44) and use the digital

sound field processor. (Refer to pages 45 to 49.)

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

–dB

MASTER VOLUME

MUTE

BASIC OPERATIONS

TO PLAY A SOURCE

VOLUME

–dB

STANDBY/ON

1, 6

3, 4

Note: If you use the remote control transmitter, be sure to use it with the lid open.

Front panel

Remote control

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

Front panel

Remote control

Input mode

INPUT MODE

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

MD/TAPE 1

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

DIR

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

123

CLUB

ENTER-

TAINMENT

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

456

HALL 1 HALL 2

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

DTS

SURROUND

Front panel

Remote control

SYSTEM

POWER ON

When you finish using this unit

Press the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel again or the

STANDBY key on the remote control transmitter to turn this

unit into the standby mode.

To select the tape deck connected to this

unit’s TAPE 2 terminals or the source

connected to this unit’s EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals as the input

source.

Press the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button once or more

so that the corresponding indication appears on the display.

“TAPE2 MONITOR ON”: Lights up for a few seconds just

after you select the tape deck

connected to the TAPE 2 terminals.

“EXT. DECODER IN”: Lights up when the source

connected to the EXTERNAL

DECODER INPUT terminals is

selected.

Note

The input source selected in this way has priority over any

other input source already selected.

To select another input source, the TAPE 2 MON/EXT.

DECODER button must be pressed so that neither the “TAPE

2 MON” indicator nor “EXT. DECODER IN” lights up on the

display.

Notes on input source selection

●

Note that selecting a name of input source selects the

source which is connected to the corresponding input

terminals on the rear panel.

* To select the source connected to the VIDEO AUX

terminals on the front panel, select “VIDEO AUX”.

●

The setting of the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button

cannot be canceled by selecting another input source. To

cancel it, press the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button

again so that neither the “TAPE 2 MON” indicator nor “EXT.

DECODER IN” lights up on the display.

●

If you select a video input source without canceling the

setting of the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button, the

playback result will be the video image from the video

source and the sound from the source selected by the

TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button.

●

If a different audio source is selected with the input selector

keys on the remote control transmitter while enjoying a

video source, the sound from the newly selected audio

source is heard, but the picture from the video source can

still be seen.

●

When you select an input source, the DSP program (or the

state of no DSP program is used) which was used when the

same input source was selected the last time will be

automatically recalled.

●

If a nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit

playing back a source is misoperating, “INPUT DATA

ERROR” appears on the display.

Front panel

Remote control

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

TAPE 2 MON

/ EXT. DECODER

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

STANDBY

TAPE 2 MON

English

Switching the input mode

This unit allows you to switch the input mode only for sources

that input two or more types of signals to this unit.

m For CD, MD/TAPE 1, TV/DBS and

DVD/VCR 3 sources:

The following two input modes are provided.

AUTO:

This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the

power of this unit.

In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the

following order of priority.

1. Digital signal encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the

DTS, or Normal digital input signal (PCM)

2. Analog input signal (ANALOG)

* For CD, TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3 sources, if digital signals

are input from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL

terminals, the digital signal from the OPTICAL terminal is

selected.

DTS:

In this mode, only digital input signal encoded with the DTS is

selected even though other signals are input at the same time.

ANALOG

In this mode, only analog input signal is selected even though

digital signal is input at the same time.

Select this mode when you want to use the analog input signal

instead of the digital input signal.

m For LD sources:

The following five input modes are provided.

AUTO:

This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the

power to this unit.

In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the

following order of priority.

1. Dolby Digital (AC-3) RF signal (DOLBY DIGITAL)

2. Digital signal encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the

DTS, or Normal digital input signal (PCM)

3. Analog input signal (ANALOG)

AC-3 RF:

In this mode, only Dolby Digital (AC-3) RF signal is selected.

DTS:

In this mode, only digital input signal encoded with the DTS is

selected even though other signals are input at the same time.

DIGITAL:

In this mode, only digital input signal is selected even though

other types of signals are input at the same time.

ANALOG

In this mode, only analog input signal is selected even though

other types of signals are input at the same time.

Notes on input mode selection

●

For the TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3 sources, the input mode

selected on the function “11. INPUT MODE” in the SET

MENU mode is selected when you turn on the power of this

unit.

●

To play back an LD source with the Dolby Digital (AC-3)

decoded, set the input mode to “AUTO” or “AC-3 RF”.

●

When you want to enjoy a source which has normal 2-

channel signals with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program,

select the ANALOG mode.

●

In the AUTO mode, there may be a case depending on

some LD players or DVD players that when you make a

search on a source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or

the DTS during playback and then playback is restored,

sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital

input signal is selected again.

●

For sources PHONO, TUNER, TAPE 2, VCR 1, VCR 2 and

V-AUX, the input mode cannot be changed because they

input analog signals only to this unit.

●

When the input source is changed to LD, CD, MD/TAPE 1,

TV/DBS or DVD/VCR 3, or the input mode is changed, the

currently selected input mode is shown on the display panel

and the monitor screen.

If changed to the AUTO mode, the type of selected input

signal is also shown as figured below.

* However, if those operations are made when the test tone is

output from this unit, the type of selected input signal will

not be shown. (Only “AUTO” will be displayed.)

Notes on playing back a source encoded with the DTS

●

When you play back an LD or CD source with the DTS

decoded (with the red “dts” indicator illuminated on the

display) in the AUTO mode, a noise may be heard just

after playback begins. To prevent such a noise, select

the DTS mode.

Be careful not to play back these sources in the

ANALOG mode. If they are played back in the ANALOG

mode, only a noise will be output from the speakers.

●

If you play back a CD or LD source encoded with the

DTS in the AUTO mode, this unit is locked in the DTS-

decoding mode automatically to prevent the generation

of noise possible in subsequent operations. In this state,

the red “dts” indicator flashes.

In this state, if you play back a CD or LD with normal

(PCM) digital signals, no sound will be heard. To play

back these sources normally, press the INPUT MODE

button on the front panel or the input selector key for the

currently selected source on the remote control

transmitter so that “PCM” appears on the display.

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

1 Set the REC OUT selector to the SOURCE position.

2 Select the source you want to record.

3 Play the source and then turn the VOLUME control up

to confirm the input source.

4 Begin recording on the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)

or VCR connected to this unit.

5 If the second tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)

connected to this unit’s TAPE 2 REC terminals is used

for recording, you can monitor the sounds being

recorded by pressing the TAPE 2 MON/EXT.

DECODER so that the “TAPE 2 MON” indicator lights

up on the display.

TO RECORD A SOURCE TO TAPE (OR MD) (OR DUBBING FROM A

TAPE TO ANOTHER)

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

Note: If you use the remote control transmitter, be sure to use it

with the lid open.

Front panel

Remote control

MD/TAPE 1

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

DIR

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

123

CLUB

ENTER-

TAINMENT

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

456

HALL 1 HALL 2

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

DTS

SURROUND

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

–dB

MASTER VOLUME

MUTE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

English

To record a source to tape (or MD) while listening to (or watching) another

source

Regardless of the setting of the INPUT SELECTOR, when you set the REC OUT selector to CD, the audio signal from your CD

player can be recorded by your first tape deck (or MD recorder) which is connected to this unit’s MD/TAPE 1 REC terminals.

Likewise, when the REC OUT selector is set to LD, TV/DBS, VCR 2, DVD/VCR 3 or VIDEO AUX, both the audio and video signals

of the selected source can be recorded by your first VCR which is connected to this unit’s VCR 1 OUT terminals.

1 Select the source you want to record.

2 Play the source.

3 Confirm the source by selecting it with the INPUT

SELECTOR and turning up the VOLUME control.

4 Begin recording on the first tape deck (or MD recorder

etc.) or the first VCR connected to this unit.

5 To monitor the sound (and picture) to be recorded (or

being recorded), select the tape deck (or VCR) being

used for recording with the INPUT SELECTOR.

6 If you want to enjoy another source while recording,

select it with the INPUT SELECTOR.

Notes

●

While recording, you can use any other VCR or tape deck

not selected by the REC OUT selector to record an audio

and video source selected by the INPUT SELECTOR.

●

The audio and video signals from VCR 2 (or DVD/VCR 3)

are sent to VCR 1 when the REC OUT selector is set to

VCR 2 (or DVD/VCR 3).

●

If the REC OUT selector is set to VCR 2 (or DVD/VCR 3),

you cannot dub from your first VCR to the second VCR (or

the third VCR), even if VCR 1 is selected by the INPUT

SELECTOR.

●

To dub the audio signal from your second tape deck to the

first one, press the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button

so that the “TAPE 2 MON” indicator lights up on the display

(and set the INPUT SELECTOR to any source other than

MD/TAPE 1 before beginning to record).

Note: If you use the remote control transmitter, be sure to use it with the lid open.

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

Front panel

Remote control

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME

–dB

MASTER VOLUME

MUTE

MD/ TAPE 1

3, 5, 6

MD/TAPE 1

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

DIR

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

123

CLUB

ENTER-

TAINMENT

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

456

HALL 1 HALL 2

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

DTS

SURROUND

Adjusting the BALANCE control

Adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right

speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by

speaker location or listening room conditions.

Note

This control is effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

Using the BASS EXTENSION switch

You can boost bass frequency response by setting this switch

to the “ON” position. This switch is effective only on the sound

from the main speakers.

Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE

controls

BASS : Turn this clockwise to increase (or counter-

clockwise to decrease) the low frequency

response.

TREBLE : Turn this clockwise to increase (or counter-

clockwise to decrease) the high frequency

response.

Note

These controls are effective only for the sound from the main

speakers.

Notes on recording

●

The settings of DSP and the VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE,

BALANCE controls and the BASS EXTENSION switch

have no effect on the material being recorded.

●

Composite video and S video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected

to provide only a S video (or only a composite video) signal,

you can record only a S video (or only a composite video)

signal on your VCR.

●

A source that is connected to this unit between optical

digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or

VCR other than the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.)

connected to the OPTICAL MD/TAPE 1 REC terminal of

this unit.

●

Dolby Digital (AC-3) RF audio input signal cannot be

recorded by a tape deck or VCR. To record an LD source,

the LD player must be connected to the OPTICAL digital

audio signal input terminal and/or analog audio signal input

terminals of this unit.

●

A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER

INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded.

●

Please check the copyright laws in your country to record

from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of

If you watch a video software that uses scramble or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there

may be a case that display information superimposed on

the picture and/or the picture itself is disturbed due to

those signals.

BASS TREBLE

BASS

EXTENSION

OFF

FOR SOUND CONTROL ON THIS UNIT

BALANCE

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

/ EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

DISCSTOP

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

123

CLUB

ENTER-

TAINMENT

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

456

HALL 1 HALL 2

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

10 11

DTS

SURROUND

English

USING DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP)

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand

and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your

listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend

on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments.

In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound

reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded

with the DTS. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including a combined

operation of the YAMAHA DSP and the Dolby Digital (AC-3), the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or the DTS.

This unit has 12 programs for digital sound field processing; 6 from actual acoustic environments from around the world, and 6

programs for Audio/Video sources. In addition, each program has two or three subprograms. All programs contain various

parameters that can be adjusted to the listener’s taste.

For details about digital sound field programs, refer to pages 50 to 54.

1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “BASIC OPERATIONS” on page 39.

2 When operating on the front panel:

If no program name is illuminated on the display panel,

press the EFFECT button to turn on the digital sound

field processor so that a name of DSP program

lights up on the display panel and the monitor screen.

PLAYING A SOURCE WITH AN EFFECT OF THE DIGITAL SOUND

FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP)

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

When operating on the remote control transmitter:

Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the

PARAMETER position.

Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the

lid open.

DVD/V

PARAMETER

SET MENU

CONTINUED

EFFECT

3 Select the desired program that is suitable for the source.

* The name of the selected program lights up on the display panel and the monitor screen.

●

If desired, adjust the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on pages 48 and 49.)

●

If desired, you can create your own sound field taste. (For details, refer to pages 56 to 60.)

Notes

●

Program selection can be made to individual input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected

at that time. So, when you select the same input source next time, the same program is automatically called.

●

If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press the EFFECT button. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround

sound effect.

●

When a monaural sound source is played with the program DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, no sound is heard from the main

speakers and the rear speakers. Sound is heard only from the center speaker. However, if the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the

SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, the main speakers output the sound of the center channel.

●

When this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder is used, if the main-source sound is

considerably altered by overadjustment of the BASS or TREBLE control, the relationship between the center and rear channels

may produce an unnatural effect.

●

When a source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the DSP cannot be used

and the EFFECT button also will not function.

PRO LOGIC

DSP

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

CHURCH

123

CLUB

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

TAINMENT

ENTER-

456

HALL 1 HALL 2

789

10 11

DTS

SURROUND

Subprogram name

Program name

Press once or more.

b) Select a desired subprogram by pressing the same

DSP program selector key once or more, or by

pressing the +/– keys.

PROGRAM

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

/ EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

123

CLUB

ENTER-

TAINMENT

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

456

HALL 1 HALL 2

789

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

10 11

DTS

SURROUND

NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1

CINEMA DSP

7ch

VOLUME

INPUT SELECTOR

TAPE 2 MON

/EXT. DECODER

–dB

PHONES BASS

EXTENSION

BASS TREBLE BALANCE

DVD/VCR 3

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

VCR 1

VCR 2

TV/DBS

SOURCE

MD/TAPE 1

VIDEO AUX

INPUT MODE

SET MENU PROGRAM EFFECT

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

STANDBY/ON

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

TAPE 2 MON

When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote control transmitter:

English

To enjoy a video source encoded with

the Dolby Pro Logic Surround, the

Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS

When you select the program No. 10, 11 or 12, and the input

signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic

Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the

input signal of the source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-

3), Dolby Digital (AC-3) is automatically decoded.

When some program is selected and the input signal of the

source is encoded with the DTS, DTS is automatically decoded.

The following indicators on the display panel show you what

sound processing is being made.

1 Lights up when a DVD source encoded with the DTS is

played back and the DTS is decoded.

2 Lights up when an LD source or a CD source encoded with

the DTS is played back and the DTS is decoded.

3 Lights up when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is being decoded

and the signals of selected source encoded with the

Dolby Digital (AC-3) is not in 2-channels.

This indicator also lights up when the input mode is set to

“AC-3 RF” even if no signal encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) is input to this unit.

4 Lights up when the Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being

decoded

5 Lights up when the Digital Sound Field Processor is

turned on.

In addition, for the program No. 10, 11 and 12, the name of the

selected subprogram on the display panel or the monitor screen

will change according to the type of decoding. (For details, refer

to pages 53 to 54.)

Notes

●

The Dolby Digital (AC-3) will not be decoded to the source

that is not encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3).

The DTS will not be decoded to the source that is not

encoded with the DTS.

●

If the input signals of source encoded with the Dolby Digital

(AC-3) are in 2-channels only, the sound processing for them

is similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals.

Note

If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with the DTS

decoded to another disc not encoded with the DTS when the

red “dts” indicator is illuminated, playing back the newly

selected disc will output no sound. In this state, the red “dts”

indicator flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTS-

decoding mode.

To play back the disc normally, change the current DTS-

decoding mode to another mode by pressing an input selector

key on the remote control transmitter or the INPUT MODE

button on the front panel so that the red “dts” indicator turns

off.

To cancel the effect sound

The EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFFECT ON/OFF

key on the remote control transmitter make it simple to compare

the normal stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound.

To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound,

press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button. Press

the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button a second time

to restore the effect sound.

Notes

●

If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with the

Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS are input to this unit, signals of

all channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers.

●

If the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key is pressed

to turn effect sounds OFF when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the

DTS is decoded, it may happen that sound is output faintly or

not output normally depending on a source. In that case, press

the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key to turn effect

sounds ON, or use input signals not encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) or the DTS.

●

If the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key is

pressed to turn effect sounds OFF when the Dolby Digital

(AC-3) is decoded, the sampling frequency and channel

formation of the decoded signal is shown on the display

panel.

ex.)

* If the input source is a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source, “K”

is shown at the head of channel formation.

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL SOURCE

AC 3 DTS PCM

Front panel

Remote control

EFFECT

ON/OFF

Sampling frequency is

48 kHz.

Three channels at the front

Two channels at the rear

EFFECT OFF

fs=48k in : 3/2

ADJUSTING OUTPUT LEVEL OF THE CENTER, RIGHT REAR, LEFT

REAR, FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS AND SUBWOOFER

If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of the each

speaker even if the output level is already set in “SPEAKER

BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on pages 29 to 31.

Note: These adjustments can be made only when the effect

sound is on. If none of the indicators , ,

and are illuminated on the display

panel, press the EFFECT button on the front panel or the

EFFECT ON/OFF key on the remote control transmitter so that

at least one of those indicators lights up on the display panel.

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

DSP

1 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch on the remote

control transmitter to the PARAMETER position.

3 Press once or more until the name of speaker(s) whose

level you want to adjust appears on the display.

Whenever pressed, the selection changes as the above chart

shows.

* Pressing the key on the remote control transmitter

changes the selection in the reverse order.

4 Adjust the level on the selected speaker(s).

5 Repeat step 2 and 3 to make adjustments on other

speaker(s).

CENTER

LS/RS

FRONT

SWFR

(Center speaker output level)

(Left and right rear speaker output level)

(Front effect speaker output level)

(Subwoofer output level)

Method of adjustment

This adjustment can be made only by using the remote control transmitter.

Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the lid open.

LEVEL

PARAMETER

SET MENU

English

Speakers

CENTER

RIGHT SURROUND (RS)

LEFT SURROUND (LS)

SUBWOOFER (SWFR)

FRONT

Preset value

Control range (dB)

MUTE, –40 to +10

MUTE, –20 to 0

MUTE, –40 to +10

Notes

●

In this way, the output level of left rear and right rear

speakers are adjusted at the same time, keeping the

difference of level between them unchanged.

To adjust each level of them respectively, follow the method

of “SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on pages 29 to

31.

●

If the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode is

set in the “NONE” position, the sound output level of the

center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because in this

mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left

and right main speakers.

●

Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the

same in all the digital sound field programs.

●

The value of each speaker output level you set the last time

will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby

mode.

However, if the power cord is kept disconnected for more

than one week, these values will be automatically changed

back to the original factory settings.

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of

these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields were recorded at actual

locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment.

Note

The channel level balance between the left and right rear effect speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are

listening to. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field recreations are actual acoustic environments.

Program No. 1 to 6: Hi-Fi DSP programs (for audio sources)

●

When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( )

Speaker output: main, rear, front effect

●

When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( )

Speaker output: main, center, rear, front effect

●

When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( )

Speaker output: main, center, rear, front effect

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

FEATURE

This is a large fan-shaped concert hall in Munich which has approximately

2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively

little reflection from the right and left walls, and sounds spread finely and

beautifully.

This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 2500 seats.

Almost the whole interior except the ceiling is made of wood, including

mahogany reflective panels. Special reflective paneling above the stage

produces strong frontal reflections which tend to reinforce the direct sound

from the stage. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound.

A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars

and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections. Those

reflections and the reflections from all directions of the hall produce a very

full, rich sound.

This is a large 2600-seat concert hall in the United States which features a

fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple,

suggesting an American taste. Sound of the middle and high frequencies

are richly and beautifully reproduced.

A classic large shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 2200 seats. It

has a circular stage and seats located behind the stage.

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections

from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. You will experience

the sound field with a great deal of presence sitting at about the center

position near the stage.

This sound field is also effective for karaoke. This is because you feel as if

you are standing on a real stage.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

1 CONCERT Hall A in Europe

HALL 1

Hall B in Europe

Hall C in Europe

2 CONCERT Hall D in U.S.A.

HALL 2

Hall E in Europe

Live Concert

BRIEF OVERVIEW OF

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

English

FEATURE

The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate

reverberations. This is ideal for reproducing church music played by a pipe

organ etc.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high

pointed dome and columns along the sides. This interior produces very long

reverberations.

This program features a sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of

the monastery, a beautiful medieval Gothic structure located in Royaumont

on the outskirts of Paris. The dome-like spaces in the ceiling formed by the

supporting pillars cause reverberations to echo and create a beautiful,

lingering tone.

A jazz club in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious

floor area. The reflection pattern is similar to that of a small hall.

A traditional New York jazz club located on 7th Avenue. This room has a

low ceiling, and the “stage” is located in a corner. This program does not

produce nearly as many reflections as the concert hall or church

programs, but creates an intimate “close-to-the-music” feel.

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line,” a famous New

York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a

sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program

was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club.

This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound

field is created with relatively clear reflections by the wall.

This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect

sounds, and extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena theater.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is

also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound.

This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties where you

can hear the sound directly from the rear as well, thus realizing music

enjoyment over a wide area.

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds etc.

whichever kind of source is used, stereo or monaural. You can enjoy video

games with much power and presence.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

3 CHURCH Tokyo

Freiburg

Royaumont

4 JAZZ CLUB Village Gate

Village Vanguard

The Bottom Line

5 ROCK The Roxy Theatre

CONCERT

Warehouse Loft

Arena

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

Party

Game/Amusement

FEATURE

This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel that

you are in the midst of the action, as if attending an actual jazz or rock

concert.

The indirect sound constituent spreads on the surround side of the sound

field by the use of data of a large round hall for the surround side, so the

image space around the screen and the sound space are fully expanded.

With this program, the voice of a disc jockey sounds more clearly, and

music entertains you with a rich sound field feeling.

This program provides excellent depth of vocals and overall clarity,

restraining excessive reverberation.

For opera, the orchestra pit and the stage are ideally combined, letting you

feel a full presence sound. The rear surround side of the sound field is

relatively moderated, however, it reproduces beautiful sound by the use of

the data of a concert hall. You will not be tired from long watching of an

opera.

This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of

a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live

sound field unique to a pavilion, and helps to make a concert scene more

exciting.

This program is for reproducing monaural video sources (old movies etc.).

Monaural sounds are reproduced with much presence by the front

presence side of the sound field and optimum reverberation effect. The

use of the center speaker makes conversations more audible, obtaining a

pleasant mix of conversations and picture.

Though the front presence side of the sound field is relatively narrow, the

rear surround side employs the sound environment of a large concert hall.

With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as

the news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo

broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center

position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the

surround side, however, spreading of them to the rear side is properly

restrained.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

7 CONCERT Pop/Rock

VIDEO 1

8 CONCERT Classical/Opera

VIDEO 2

Pavilion

9 TV THEATER Mono Movie

Variety/Sports

Program No. 7 to 12: CINEMA-DSP programs (for Audio/Video

sources)

●

These programs use the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder.

●

Speaker output for each program is as follows.

No. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11: main, center, rear, front effect

No. 12 (Normal): main, center, rear

No. 12 (Enhanced): main, center, rear, front effect

●

For program No. 7, 8 and 9 only, indicators light up as follows.

When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( )

When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( )

When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( )

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

English

FEATURE

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound

in detail, giving both the video and the sound field

incredible reality. Any kind of video sources encoded

with the Dolby Surround or DTS (especially large-scale

movie productions) are ideal for use with this program.

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound design of science fiction films,

thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space

amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a

virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital (AC-3) and DTS-encoded software

employing the most advanced techniques.

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound

design of the newest multi-track films. The sound field is

made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters,

so the reverberations of the sound field itself are

restrained as much as possible. The data of the sound

field of an opera house are used for the front presence

side, so the three dimensional feeling of the sound field

is emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the

screen. By using the data of the sound field of a concert

hall on the rear surround side, powerfull reverberations

are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure

movies, etc. with much presence.

This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track

film, and characterized by a soft and extensive sound

field. The front presence side of the sound field is

relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and

toward the screen, restraining echo effect of

conversations without losing clarity. For the surround

side, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully

in a wide space at the rear of the sound field.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

10 MOVIE 70 mm Spectacle

THEATER 1 ( )

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels.

DGTL Spectacle

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Spectacle

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the DTS .

70 mm Sci-Fi

( )

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels.

DGTL Sci-Fi

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Sci-Fi

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the DTS.

11 MOVIE 70 mm Adventure

THEATER 2 ( )

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels.

DGTL Adventure

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS Adventure

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the DTS.

70 mm General

( )

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels.

DGTL General

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS General

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the DTS.

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

●

Program No. 10 to 11 are suitable for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with the Dolby

Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with the DTS (bearing the “dts” logo).

FEATURE

The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) decoder or the DTS decoder precisely

reproduces sounds and sound effects of a source

encoded with the Dolby Surround or the DTS. The

realization of a highly efficient decoding process improves

crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound

positioning smoother and more precise.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker

systems of the newest film theater. The digital sound field

processing and the Dolby Surround decoding or the DTS

decoding are precisely performed without altering the

originally designed sound orientation. The surround

effects produced by this sound field fold the viewer

naturally from the rear to the left and right and toward the

screen.

No. PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM (TYPE)

12 /DTS PRO LOGIC/Normal ( )

SURROUND Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels.

DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal ( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the DTS.

PRO LOGIC/Enhanced

( )

Functions when the input signal is analog

or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby

Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels.

DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels.

DTS DIGITAL SUR./Enhanced

( )

Functions when the input signal is encoded

with the DTS.

DSP

DIGITAL

DSP

PRO LOGIC

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

Note: If the “NONE” position is selected on “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from

the center speaker(s).

●

Program No. 12 is for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with the Dolby Surround

(bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with the DTS (bearing the “dts” logo).

English

ON SCREEN DISPLAY

If you connect your video cassette recorder, LD player, video

monitor, etc. to this unit, you can take advantage of this unit’s

capability to display program titles, parameter data and

information for various setting changes and adjustments on

your video monitor’s screen. This information will be

superimposed over the video image.

If there is no video source connected or it is turned off, the

information will be displayed over a blue colored background.

Note: The program titles, parameter data and other

information are also displayed on the display panel of this unit.

Selecting a type of display

You can change the type of display showing various

information on the monitor’s screen by pressing the ON

SCREEN display key on the remote control transmitter.

Whenever pressed, the screen changes to a full display, a

simple display and no display in turn.

(Example)

Full display

Simple display

Goes off after being displayed for

several seconds.

Notes

●

When making a setting change or adjustment in the SET

MENU mode, or making speaker balance adjustment by

using the test tone, information is fully displayed on the

monitor’s screen even if another type of display is currently

selected.

●

Information displayed on the monitor’s screen in this way

cannot be recorded by a VCR.

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

Hall A in Europe

EFCT TRIM

0dB

INIT. DLY

30ms

ROOM SIZE

1.0

LI VENES S 5

....

...

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

Hall A in Europe

EFCT TRIM

0dB

INIT. DLY

30ms

ROOM SIZE

1.0

LI VENES S 5

....

...

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

Hall A in Europe

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

ON SCREEN

CREATING YOUR OWN SOUND FIELDS

WHAT IS A SOUND FIELD?

In order to explain the impressive functions of the DSP, we

need to first understand what a sound field really is.

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are

the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition

to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell

where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the

room in which we are sitting. We can even tell whether it is

highly reflective with steel and glass surfaces, or more

absorbent with wood panels, carpeting and curtains.

THE ELEMENTS OF A SOUND FIELD

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two

distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the

sound field:

(1) Early Reflections.

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms — 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only—for example, from the ceiling or a

wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown

in the diagram on page 58 for any particular environment,

and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections

actually add clarity to the direct sound.

(2) Reverberations.

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface—walls, ceiling, the back of the room—so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation

taken together help us to determine the subjective size and

shape of the room, and it is this information that the DSP

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would

be able to create your own listening environment. The

acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert

hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability

to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done

with the DSP.

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to

the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are

preset with values precisely calculated by Yamaha to create

the sound field unique for the program. It is recommended to

use DSP programs without changing values of parameters,

however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound

fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust

those parameters. Even if this unit is in the standby mode, your

custom sound fields will remain in the DSP’s memory for about

two weeks. The following page details how to make your own

sound fields.

In addition to the “TYPE” parameter which selects the

subprograms within each DSP program (e.g. “Hall A in

Europe”, “Hall B in Europe” and “Hall C in Europe” for program

1, “HALL 1”), each program also has a set of parameters that

allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic

environment to create precisely the effect you want. These

parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors

that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert

hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for

example, affects the length of time between the “early

reflections”—that is, the first few widely spaced reflections you

hear after the direct sound. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter

provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing

between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the

“room” you hear. In addition to room size, the shape of the

room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant

effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for

example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out

quicker, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to

carry on for a longer period of time. The DSP parameters allow

you to control these and many other factors that contribute to

your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially

“redesign” the concert halls and rooms provided to create

custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your

mood and music.

Refer to “DESCRIPTIONS OF THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD

PARAMETERS” on pages 58 to 60 for a description of what

each parameter does, how it effects the sound, and its control

range.

English

SELECTING AND EDITING PROGRAM PARAMETERS

This adjustment can be made only by using the remote control transmitter watching the monitor screen or the display panel.

Note

It is recommended to watch the monitor screen for making adjustments more easily than to watch the display panel.

1 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the

PARAMETER position.

Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter

with the lid open.

2 Turn your monitor on. If the currently selected type of

display is not the full display, press the ON SCREEN

display key to call the full display.

3 If no DSP program is selected, select a desired

program.

The selected program name and its parameters will be

displayed on the monitor screen. The arrow-shaped

cursor points to the subprogram name.

4 Select a desired subprogram.

Press the button for

the currently selected

program once or more.

5 Select the parameter which you want to edit.

6 Change the value on the selected parameter to create

the effect you want.

“+” increases the value of the selected parameter, and “–”

decreases the value of the selected parameter. In both cases

you can hold the key down for continuous incrementing or

decrementing.

The display will pause for a moment at the initial value of the

parameter as a reminder. (On the monitor screen,

mark at

the head of parameter name disappears at the initial value of

the parameter.)

Notes

●

For details about parameters, refer to pages 58 to 60.

●

Parameter edits made in this way will remain in effect even

with power cut due to power failure or the power plug

disconnected from the AC outlet for up to about two weeks,

after which all parameters, as well as other adjustments or

setting changes on this unit, will return to their initial values

or conditions.

PARAMETER

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

CHURCH

1 2 3

CLUB

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

TAINMENT

ENTER-

4 5 6

HALL 1 HALL 2

7 8 9

10 11

DTS

SURROUND

CHURCH

1 2 3

CLUB

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

TAINMENT

ENTER-

4 5 6

HALL 1 HALL 2

7 8 9

10 11

DTS

SURROUND

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

Hall A in Europe

EFCT TRIM

0dB

INIT. DLY

30ms

ROOM SIZE

1.0

LI VENES S 5

....

...

Subprogram

DESCRIPTIONS OF THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

●

ROOM SIZE

How it Affects the Sound:

Changes the apparent size of the music venue. The larger

the value, the larger the simulated room will sound.

What it Does:

Adjusts the timing between the early reflections. Early

reflections are the first group of reflections you hear before

the subsequent, dense reverberation begins.

Control Range:

0.1 – 2.0

Standard setting is 1.0.

Changing this parameter from 1 to 2 increases the apparent

volume of the room eight times (length, width, and height all

doubled).

P. ROOM SIZE (Presence Room Size)

Adjusts the apparent space size of the front presence sound

field. The larger the value, the longer the interval between

reflections becomes, which increases the depth of the sound

source.

S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size)

Adjusts the apparent space size of the rear surround sound field.

The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field

becomes.

●

INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)

How it Affects the Sound:

Changes the apparent distance from the source sound.

Since the distance between a sound source and a reflective

surface determines the delay between the direct sound and

the first reflection, this parameter changes the location of the

sound source within the acoustic environment.

What it Does:

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first

reflection heard by the listener.

Control Range:

1 – 99 milliseconds

For a small living room this parameter would be set for a small

value. Large values for a big room. Larger values produce an

echo effect.

P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the presence side of the sound field. The larger the value, the

later the first reflection begins.

Control Range:

1 – 99 milliseconds

S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the rear surround side of the sound field. The larger the value,

the later the first reflection begins.

Control Range:

1 – 49 milliseconds

INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Small space

Small

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Large

Level

Direct sound

Early reflections

Time

Large space

Level

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Early reflections

English

●

LIVENESS

How it Affects the Sound:

This parameter changes the apparent reflectivity of the walls

in the hall.

The early reflections from a sound source will lose intensity

(decay) much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent

wall surfaces than in one which has mostly reflective

surfaces. A room with highly reflective surfaces in which the

early reflections decay slowly is termed “live”, while a room

with absorbent characteristics in which the reflections decay

rapidly is termed “dead”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you

adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness”

of the room.

What it Does:

Changes the rate at which the early reflections decay.

Control Range:

0 – 10.

P. LIVENESS (Presence Liveness)

Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the front presence

sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the front

presence sound field becomes.

S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness)

Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the rear surround

sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the rear

surround sound field becomes.

●

REV. TIME (Reverberation Time)

How it Affects the Sound:

The natural reverberation time of a room depends primarily

on its size and the characteristics of its inner surfaces. This

parameter, therefore, changes the apparent size of the

acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

What it Does:

Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the level of the dense,

subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (1 kHz).

Control Range:

1.0 – 5.0 seconds.

The reverb time in a small-to-medium size hall would be

between 1 and 2, and in a large hall it is normally between 2

and 3.

REV. TIME

60 dB

REV. TIME

60 dB

REV. TIME

60 dB

Level

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Dead Live

Level

Reverberations Reverberations Reverberations

Time

Small

Level Level

Time

Large

Direct sound

Early reflections

●

REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay)

This parameter sets the time difference between the beginning of

the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound.

The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound will begin.

A later reverberation sound makes you feel like the space of the

acoustic environment has become larger.

Control Range:

0 – 250 milliseconds

●

REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level)

This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control Range:

0 – 100%

●

EFCT TRIM (Effect Trim)

Performs fine adjustment of the level of all the effect sounds.

Control Range:

–3 dB to 3 dB

●

S. DELAY (Surround Delay)

Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

on the rear surround side sound field. The larger the value, the

later the surround sound field is generated.

Control Range:

When the Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded:

15 – 30 milliseconds

When the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded:

0 – 15 milliseconds

When a program without the Dolby Surround or the DTS

encoded is used:

0 – 15 milliseconds

REV.TIME

60 dB

REV.DELAY

Level

Direct sound

Reverberations

Time

REV. LEVEL

Level

Direct sound

Time

English

Whenever the SLEEP key is pressed, the SLEEP time will

change as follows.

After a while, the display returns to the indication before

the SLEEP timer is set.

2 The unit will be turned into the standby mode

automatically at the selected SLEEP time.

To cancel the selected SLEEP time

Press once or more so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the

display. (It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will

go off from the display.)

Note

The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by turning this

unit into the standby mode with the STANDBY/ON switch on

the front panel (or the STANDBY key on the remote control

transmitter) or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from

the AC outlet.

SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

SLEEP

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

SLEEP

If you use the SLEEP timer of this unit, you can make this unit turn into the standby mode. When you are going to sleep while

enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source, this timer function is helpful.

Notes

●

The SLEEP timer can be controlled only with the remote control transmitter.

●

The components on which the SLEEP timer is effective are the sources connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear

panel of this unit.

To set the SLEEP time

Press once or more to select the desired

SLEEP time.

120 90 60 30

The SLEEP timer is off (OFF).

(The state before the SLEEP key

is pressed.)

(Minutes)

Indicates the SLEEP time.

Flashes.

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

DVD/VCR 3

AUX

SLEEP

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

PHONO

BASIC OPERATIONS (When the lid is open)

The remote control transmitter provided with this unit is designed to control all the most commonly used functions of this unit. If the

CD player, tape deck, tuner, LD player, etc. connected to this unit are YAMAHA components designed for remote control

compatibility, then this remote control transmitter will also control various functions of each component.

* For basic operations, use the remote control transmitter with the lid open.

NAMES OF KEYS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

MACROQUICK

OFFSLOW

MD/TAPE 1

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

/ EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

DIR

DISCSTOP

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

1 2 3

CLUB

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

TAINMENT

ENTER-

4 5 6

HALL 1 HALL 2

7 8 9

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

DTS

SURROUND

LIGHT

Lid is opened. Side panel

REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER

English

1 Tape deck keys

Control tape deck.

(The A/B/C switch (

G) should be set to the “A” position.)

* DIR A, B and A/B are applicable only to double

cassette tape deck.

* For a single cassette deck with automatic reverse

function, pressing DIR A will reverse the direction of

tape running.

2 CD/LD player keys

Control compact disc player or LD player.

(To control compact disc player, set the A/B/C switch (

G) to

the “A” position. To control LD player, set the A/B/C switch

(

G) to the “B” position.)

* DISC is applicable only to compact disc changer.

* STOP is applicable only to LD player.

3 Tuner keys

Control tuner.

(The A/B/C switch (

G) should be set to the “A” position.)

+: Selects higher preset station number.

–: Selects lower preset station number.

A/B/C/D/E: Selects the group (A – E) of preset station

numbers.

4 DSP program selector keys

Select a DSP program when the built-in digital sound field

processor (including the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder,

the Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder and the DTS decoder) is on.

5 LEVEL key

When you will adjust output level of the center speaker(s), rear

speakers, front effect speakers or subwoofer, first press this

key once or more so that the name of speaker(s) whose level

you want to adjust appears on the display. While the name is

illuminated on the display, you can change the level by

pressing the + or – keys (

)

6 PARAMETER/SET MENU switch

Set to the PARAMETER position when you edit a parameter of

a DSP program. Set to the SET MENU position when you will

make an adjustment or setting change on a function in the SET

MENU mode.

7 TEST key

Used for speaker balance adjustment. (For details, refer to

pages 29 to 31.)

8 SLEEP timer key

This key is used to turn the built-in SLEEP timer on and off,

and to set the SLEEP time. (For details, refer to page 61.)

9 ON SCREEN display key

Changes the type of display showing the program name and

parameters, or information for various setting changes and

adjustments on the connected monitor’s screen.

Whenever pressed, the screen changes to a full display, a

simple display and no display in turn.

0 SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys

Pressing the SYSTEM POWER ON key turns the power to this

unit on and pressing the STANDBY key turns this unit into the

standby mode.

A RESET button

This button is inside the battery compartment.

Press this button to “reset” the internal microcomputer which

controls remote control operations. Microcomputer “reset” is

necessary when the remote control freezes.

* Pressing the RESET button will not erase learned

functions.

B MASTER VOLUME (up) and (down) keys

Turn the volume level up and down.

C MUTE key

When pressed, this key mutes the volume level. To resume the

original volume level, press this key again.

While muting, the indicator on the VOLUME control flashes

continuously.

D / and –/+ keys

(up) and (down) keys change parameters (or functions)

in the mode selected by the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch.

– and + keys make an adjustment or setting change on the

parameter (or function) selected by the or key.

E EFFECT ON/OFF key

Switches on/off the digital sound field processor (including the

Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby Digital (AC-3)

decoder and the DTS decoder).

F A/B/C indicators

The position (A, B or C) selected by the A/B/C switch is shown

in red.

G A/B/C switch

This switch must be used only when the lid of the remote

control transmitter is open. (This switch will not function when

the lid is closed.)

Normally, set this switch to the “A” position. When controlling a

Yamaha LD player by using the CD/LD player keys (

), set

this switch to the “B” position.

H Input selector keys

Select input source. The TAPE 2 MON key differs from other

input selector keys in function. It is identical with the TAPE 2

MON/EXT. DECODER button on the front panel. Refer to page

23 for details.

I TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

Lights up when the remote control transmitter is transmitting

infrared signals (when a command key is pressed).

J LIGHT key

If this key is pressed, some of the keys on the remote control

unit light up for about 5 seconds. If this key is pressed while

those keys are lighting up, they stop lighting.

Note

When using the keys to control Yamaha components,

identify them with your component’s keys. If these keys

are identical, their functions will be the same. For each key

function, refer to the corresponding instruction in your

component’s manual.

RESET button

LEARNING NEW CONTROL FUNCTIONS (When the lid is open)

This is a learning remote control transmitter. The shaded keys in the illustration shown below can be programmed to “learn”

control functions from other remote control transmitters. By learning key-functions from other remote control transmitter, this unit can

then be used in place of one or more other remote control transmitters, thus making operation of your various audio and video

components more convenient.

Some of the “learning-capable” keys are originally empty and others have already been preset with functions to control this unit and

other Yamaha components. You can store new functions to them (in place of preset functions) as desired.

* See page 70 for the learning method.

* See page 72 for clearing a learned function (or all learned functions).

Note

If the memory capacity of the remote control transmitter becomes full, no further learning is possible even if some learning-capable

keys are not occupied with new functions. If, for example, you store Yamaha codes only into this remote control transmitter, up to

about 50 functions can be stored. Store new functions to the learnable-capable keys which are useful for you.

Keys which can have three functions (1, 2, 3, 4)

In the “Learning-capable” keys, the keys numbered 1–4 in the

illustration at left can have three functions. This is because they

have three memory areas (A, B and C). (One function per area.)

You can store new functions into the area B and C, and use three

functions on a key by switching the memory areas with the A/B/C

switch. (Area A cannot learn a new function.)

To use these keys:

1. Before using a key, select the area A, B or C of the key on which

the function you want to use is stored by using the A/B/C switch.

2. Press the key.

The original factory settings of these keys are as follows.

Preset with

functions for

controlling a

Yamaha tape deck.

Preset with

functions for

controlling a

Yamaha CD player.

(STOP is empty.)

Preset with

functions for

controlling

a Yamaha tuner.

Preset as the DSP

program selector

keys

Empty

Preset with functions

for controlling a

Yamaha LD player.

(DISC is empty.)

Empty

Preset as the DSP

program selector

keys

Empty

Preset as the DSP

program selector

keys

The position of A/B/C switch

Note

The area A of all keys cannot learn new functions. To store new

functions to these keys, store them onto the area B or C.

Empty keys (1)

These are empty keys. Each key can learn a function from another

remote control transmitter.

For example, the TV key is useful for storing the function of your

TV’s power switch, and the VCR key can be used for your VCR’s

power switch.

MD/TAPE 1

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

TAPE 2 MON

/ EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

DIR

DISCSTOP

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

1 2 3

CLUB

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

TAINMENT

ENTER-

4 5 6

HALL 1 HALL 2

7 8 9

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

VCR 2

DTS

SURROUND

A/B/C switch

Lid is open.

: These buttons are used for learning a new function

or clearing a learned function (or all learned

functions). For details, refer to pages 70 to 72 .

English

Note

If a key which has a preset function learns a new function, the

preset function will not be deleted, but disabled. When the

learned function is cleared, the preset function is restored. (For

information on clearing a learned function, refer to page 72.)

About the marks shown on the remote control

transmitter

The marks on the remote control transmitter signify functions of

keys, input sources, etc.

Examples)

(tape): Tape deck, VCR, etc.

(disc): CD player, LD player, etc.

(radio wave): Tuner, TV/BS tuner, etc.

These marks are helpful for storing new functions.

Examples)

• The area B of keys 1 is suitable for storing functions to

control your VCR.

• The area B of keys 3 is suitable for storing functions to

control your TV/BS tuner.

About the lighting of keys

When you press an input selector key, it lights up for about 3

seconds.

When an input selector key in the group of selected memory

area (A, B or C) is pressed, the mark of key group (

1–3)

which is the same as the mark of the selected input selector

key lights up for about 3 seconds.

Example)

Conversely, when a key of group

1–3 is pressed, its mark

and the input selector key with the same mark in the group of

the selected memory area light up for about 3 seconds.

This feature may be helpful for you if you store functions for

controlling an input source to a group of keys whose mark

lights up when the corresponding input selector key is pressed.

MD/TAPE 1

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

DIR

DISCSTOP

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

Red (This shows that

the memory area A is

selected.)

Lights up.

USING OPERATION CONTROL KEYS (When the lid is closed)

When the lid of the remote control transmitter is closed, you can easily operate Yamaha components including learned functions by

using the OPERATION CONTROL keys.

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

VCR

MUTE

MASTER

VOLUME

OPERATION

CONTROL

TRANSMIT

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

PHONO

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

MD/TAPE 1

TAPE 2 MON

EFFECT

MD/TAPE 1

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

/ EXT. DECODER/ EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

DIR

DISCSTOP

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

1 2 3

CLUB

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

TAINMENT

ENTER-

4 5 6

HALL 1 HALL 2

7 8 9

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

DTS

SURROUND

Input selector keys

OPERATION CONTROL keys

Lid is closed.

When the lid is closed, the OPERATION CONTROL keys

substitute for the keys numbered 1, 2 and 3 on the above

illustration. To use these keys, you do not have to switch the

A/B/C switch. The functions which the OPERATION

CONTROL keys carry out are determined by which input

selector key was pressed before using the OPERATION

CONTROL keys.

Note

When the lid is closed, the EFFECT, MASTER VOLUME,

MUTE, TV and VCR keys will function in the same way as

when the lid is open.

* If the MACRO switch on the side of the remote control

transmitter is set to “OFF”, when the lid is closed, the

SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys also will

function in the same way as when the lid is open.

Notes

• If the OPERATION CONTROL keys substitute for keys

which have no function (empty), no command is carried out.

According to your plan, store functions from other remote

control transmitters into an empty area of those keys. (Refer

to page 70 for the learning method.)

• While playing an audio/video unit, if you want to operate

another unit by using the remote control transmitter (for

example, if you want to rewind a tape on your VCR while

listening to a CD), you should open the lid of the remote

control transmitter and use the A/B/C switch and the

corresponding keys.

(If you press an input selector key with the lid closed to

change the functions of the OPERATION CONTROL keys to

the functions for controlling a VCR, the input of currently

playing CD source is canceled.)

About the lighting of keys

When an input selector key is pressed, the pressed key and

only the available OPERATION CONTROL keys (which

substitute for the keys stored with the preset functions or

learned functions) light up for about 3 seconds. So you will

know what keys are available at a glance.

Conversely, when an OPERATION CONTROL key is pressed,

all of the available OPERATION CONTROL keys and the

currently selected input selector key light up.

English

TUNER

OPERATION

CONTROL

Examples of operations controlled by using the

OPERATION CONTROL keys

To operate a Yamaha CD player

1. Press the “CD” input selector key.

2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the

functions in area A of keys

2.)

To operate your VCR

1. Press the “VCR” input selector key.

2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the

functions in area B of keys

1. This area is originally preset

with no function. You must store the functions related to

controlling the VCR in area B of keys

1 beforehand.)

Selected input selector

Key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out

Functions in area A of keys

1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)

Functions in area A of keys

2 (except STOP, DISC, and )

Functions in area A of keys

Functions in area B of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)

Functions in area B of keys

2 (except STOP, DISC, and )

Functions in area B of keys

Functions in area C of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B)

Functions in area C of keys

2 (except STOP, DISC, and )

Functions in area C of keys

See the table below for a combination of an input selector key and key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out.

(Also, refer to the table on page 64.)

Pressing the “TAPE 2 MON” or “PHONO” input selector key has no effect on the OPERATION CONTROL keys.

MD/ TAPE 1

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

V-AUX

DBS

DVD/ VCR 3

OPERATION

CONTROL

Play

Skip to

previous track

Skip to next

track

Pause or Stop

OPERATION

CONTROL

Play

Rewind Fast forward

Pause or Stop

MACRO OPERATIONS (When the lid is closed)

“Macro” is a command which defines a sequence of several

operations.

The keys shown in the illustrations below (as preset macro

keys) are also preset with macros, in addition to individual

functions.

Each macro key is preset so that simply pressing it alone will

carry out several functions of other keys on this remote control

transmitter sequentially. (To know what key functions are

sequentially carried out by pressing each preset macro key,

see the next page.)

Macros can be used only when the lid is closed and the

MACRO switch is set to “SLOW” or “QUICK”. (If “OFF” is

selected, no macro will function even if the lid is closed.)

Preset macro keys are originally preset with macros. If you

prefer, however, you can change the contents of a macro key

by storing a desired series of functions on it. You can store up

to seven functions onto a macro key. (Refer to page 71 for the

learning method.)

Setting the MACRO switch

OFF: In this position, no macro will function even if the lid of

remote control transmitter is closed.

QUICK: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each

command is transmitted at 0.5 second intervals.

SLOW: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each

command is transmitted at 3 second intervals.

MD/TAPE 1

A/B

REC/PAUSE

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

/ EXT. DECODER

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

DIR

DISCSTOP

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

PRESET

A/B/C/D/E

CHURCH

1 2 3

CLUB

JAZZ

VIDEO 1

CONCERT

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

VIDEO 2

CONCERT

THEATER

CONCERT

ROCK

TAINMENT

ENTER-

4 5 6

HALL 1 HALL 2

7 8 9

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

TEST

MASTER VOLUME

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

10 11

MUTE

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

VCR

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

MUTE

MASTER

VOLUME

OPERATION

CONTROL

TRANSMIT

MACROQUICK

OFFSLOW

MD/TAPE 1

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

PHONO

EFFECT

TV/DBS

DVD/VCR 3

V-AUX

/ EXT. DECODER

DTS

SURROUND

Lid is closed.

(Set the MACRO switch to

“QUICK” or “SLOW”.)

Preset macro keys

MACRO switch

English

Macro key

1st

(Turning the power of this unit on)

2nd

(Selecting an input source)

3rd

(Playing a source)

“ ” on area A of keys

“ ” on area A of keys 2

–

“ ” on area B of keys

“ ” on area B of keys 2

–

“ ” on area C of keys

“ ” on area C of keys 2

–

Function of the key (and area) which operates when a macro key is pressed

Macro key

1st 2nd

–

3rd

–

Function of the key which operates when a macro key is pressed

Preset macro keys and the key functions which they carry out sequentially are as follows. (Also, refer to the table on page 64.)

Notes

• A key in which no function is stored will carry out no

command.

• If it occurs that this unit will not receive the second command

because the internal operation of the first command takes a

long time, set the MACRO switch to the “SLOW” position, or

add no function or repeat the same command between the

first command and the next command.

• If you program the power on/off switching function of TV,

VCR, etc. as part of a macro sequence, note that it switches

the current mode to the other (“on” to “off”, or “off” to “on”).

For example, when you press the macro key, if the power of

TV, VCR, etc. is already on, the power will be turned off

even though you may not want it to do so.

• Once you press a macro key, this unit will not receive the

command of another key (even if it is pressed) until this unit

finishes carrying out all commands of the macro key. Take

notice of this especially when the MACRO switch is in the

“SLOW” position.

• Once you press a macro key, you must keep the remote

control transmitter directed at the main unit’s remote control

sensor until the remote control transmitter finishes

transmitting all command signals of the macro key.

• You can also use the OPERATION CONTROL keys while

using the macro functions.

MD/ TAPE 1

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

V-AUX

PHONO

DBS

DVD/ VCR 3

MD/ TAPE 1

TUNER

VCR 1

VCR 2

TAPE 2 MON

V-AUX

PHONO

DBS

DVD/ VCR 3

SYSTEM

POWER ON

SYSTEM

POWER ON

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER ON

STANDBY

VCR

LEARNING A NEW FUNCTION

1 Place this remote control transmitter and the other

remote control transmitter so that they face each other.

* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the

LEARN button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. If this

occurs, repeat this step.

3 If necessary, select the memory area by using the A/B/C

switch on the side panel of the remote control

transmitter.

4 Press the key on this remote control transmitter in which

you will store a new function.

* If a key which cannot learn another function is pressed, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current

mode is canceled. If this occurs, repeat this step.

* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after a key is

pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly

and the mode before you began learning operations is

restored. If this occurs, restart from step 2.

5 Press and hold the key (on the other remote control

transmitter) which has the function you want to store.

When learning is finished, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

stops lighting. You can release the key. Then the indicator

begins flashing slowly.

* If a signal is not successfully received, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode

prior to step 4 is restored. If this occurs, restart from step 4.

* If memory capacity is full, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

flashes rapidly to show you that learning is impossible, and

then the mode before you began learning operations is

restored.

6 Repeat step 3–5 to store more functions.

7 When you finish the learning operation, press the

LEARN button.

Notes

●

Newly learned functions will replace previously learned

functions.

●

If there is no more room in the memory area for a function to

be learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator will flash

rapidly. In this case, even if some keys are not occupied

with functions from other remote control transmitters, no

further learning is possible.

●

If you close the lid while learning, and then about 5 seconds

pass, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and

the mode before beginning learning operations is restored. If

this occurs, restart from step 2. However, if you open the lid

within 5 seconds, the mode before closing the lid is

restored.

●

There may occasionally be instances in which, due to the

signal-coding and modulation employed by the other remote

control transmitter, this remote control transmitter will not be

able to “learn” its signals.

●

When you press the LEARN, MACRO or CLEAR button, or

the RESET button inside of the battery compartment by

using a sharp-pointed thing, be careful not to damage the

button. If you will use a mechanical pencil, make sure that

the lead is not coming out.

V-AUX

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

1 2 3

SPORTS

STADIUM

DISCO

4 5 6

ROCK

JAZZ CLUB

CHURCH

7 8 9

TEST

+10

Lights up.

V-AUX

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

1 2 3

ORTS

STADIUM

DISCO

5 6

Z CLUB

CHURCH

EST

This remote control

transmitter

Other remote

control transmitter

About 5–10 cm

(2–4 in.)

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

Flashes slowly.

(Press by using the point of

a mechanical pencil, etc.)

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

V-AUX

PHONO

EFFECT

ON/OFF

1 2 3

SPORTS

STADIUM

DISCO

4 5 6

OCK

JAZZ CLUB

CHURCH

8 9

TEST

English

* If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the

MACRO button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN

indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you pressed

the MACRO button is restored. If this occurs, press the

MACRO button again.

2 Press a preset macro key on which you want to make a

new macro.

* If a key other than a preset macro key is pressed, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the

current mode is canceled. If this occurs, repeat this step.

3 Press a key whose function you want to store as the first

function of the new macro.

* If a key whose function cannot be stored as a command of

macro is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes

rapidly and the current mode is canceled. If this occurs,

repeat this step.

* If about 30 seconds pass before a key is pressed, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode

before you began learning operations is restored. If this

occurs, restart from step 1.

4 Repeat step 3 to store the second, the third and more

functions. You can store up to seven key functions in

series as a macro.

* If the seventh key function has been learned, the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode

before you began learning operations is restored. (This

shows that the key has completed learning a series of

functions as a macro.) If this occurs, you do not have to

follow the next step.

5 When you finish learning, press the MACRO button.

MAKING A NEW MACRO

A new macro can be programmed onto any preset macro key in place of preset functions. (See page 68 to know what keys are

preset macro keys.) You can make as many as 13 new macro keys. A macro key can learn as many as seven functions of other

keys.

Note

If you store a continuous command such as lowering of volume level, it will become a short command when it is carried out as a part

of macro.

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

It is recommended to write down new key functions you

stored on the provided user function stickers and paste

them on the reverse side of the remote control transmitter

or the reverse side of the remote control transmitter’s lid.

Memory back-up

All of the learned functions will be retained while you

replace the batteries. However, if no batteries are

installed for a few hours, the learned functions will be

erased and will have to be learned again.

Goes off.

(When learning is finished,

this indicator lights up again.)

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

Flashes slowly.

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

Lights up.

SYSTEM

POWER ON

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL

TRANSMITTER

1 To clear a learned key function, press the LEARN button

using the point of a mechanical pencil, etc.

To clear a macro you made, press the MACRO button.

2 Press and hold the CLEAR button using the point of a

mechanical pencil, etc.

3 Holding the CLEAR button pressed, press and hold the

key whose function you want to clear until the indicator

flashes 3 times.

To clear two or more functions sequentially, do not

release the CLEAR button pressed, and repeat this step.

Note

If you clear a learned function of a key, the originally preset

function of the key is restored (except the keys which are

originally preset with no function.)

To Clear a Learned Function To Clear All Learned Functions

1 Select the kind of key functions all of which you want to

clear by using the MACRO switch on the side panel of

the remote control transmitter.

OFF: Select this position if you want to clear all of the

learned functions except macros.

QUICK: Select this position if you want to clear all of the

macros you made.

SLOW: Select this position if you want to clear all of the

learned functions including macros.

2 Press the CLEAR button using the point of a

mechanical pencil, etc.

* If one of the following operation is made after you press

the CLEAR button, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator

flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. If this

occurs, press the CLEAR button again.

• MACRO switch is switched to another position.

• Another key is pressed.

• There is no operation for about 30 seconds.

3 Press and hold the CLEAR button again. While holding

the CLEAR button pressed, press and hold the

MASTER VOLUME and keys simultaneously

until the indicator flashes 7 times.

MACROQUICK

OFFSLOW

CLEARING LEARNED FUNCTIONS

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

Flashes slowly.

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

Flashes.

LEARNCLEAR MACRO

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

Flashes slowly.

MUTE

TRANSMIT

/LEARN

Flashes.

English

If the unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple

measures suggested. If it cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and

contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for help.

SYMPTOM

The unit fails to turn on when the

STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, or turns

into the standby mode suddenly soon after

the power is turned on.

It happens that this unit does not work

normally.

No sound or no picture.

No picture

The sound suddenly goes off.

Only one side speaker outputs the sound.

No sound from the effect speakers.

No sound from the front effect speakers.

No sound from the center speaker.

Poor bass reproduction.

Sound “hums”.

The volume level is low while playing a

record.

The volume level cannot be increased, or

sound is distorted.

CAUSE

Power cord is not plugged in or is not

completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the

rear panel is not set to either end closely.

There is an influence of strong external

noise (lightning, excessive static electricity,

etc.) or a misoperation on this unit while

using this unit.

Incorrect output cord connections.

Appropriate input source is not selected.

Speaker connections are not secure.

Digital signals other than PCM audio and the

Dolby Digital (AC-3) (or the DTS) encoded

signals which this unit cannot reproduce are

input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc.

There is no S video terminal connection

between this unit and the TV, though S

video signals are input to this unit.

The protection circuit has been activated

because of short circuit etc.

The SLEEP timer has functioned.

Incorrect setting of the BALANCE control.

Incorrect cord connections.

The EFFECT button is set off.

A Dolby Surround (or DTS) decoding

program is being used with material not

encoded with Dolby Surround (or DTS).

The function “1E. FRONT MIX” in the SET

MENU mode is set to the “ON-5ch” position.

PRO LOGIC/Normal, DOLBY DIGITAL/

Normal or DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal of

the DSP program No. 12 is selected.

The function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET

MENU mode is set to the “NONE” position.

One of the DSP programs No. 1 to No. 6 is

selected when the input signal of source is

2-channel stereo (analog/PCM).

The input signals of source encoded with

the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS do not

have center channel signals.

The function “1D. LFE/BASS OUT” in the

SET MENU mode is set in the SWFR or

BOTH position, though your system does

not include a subwoofer.

Output mode selection for each channel

(MAIN, CENTER or REAR) is improper.

Incorrect cord connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the MD/TAPE

1 REC terminals of this unit is turned off.

REMEDY

Firmly plug in the power cord.

Set the switch to either end closely.

Turn this unit into the standby mode and

disconnect the AC power cord from the AC

outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed,

connect the power and operate this unit

again.

Connect the cords properly. If the problem

persists, the cords may be defective.

Select the appropriate input source with the

INPUT SELECTOR or the TAPE 2

MON/EXT. DECODER button.

Secure the connections.

Play a source whose signals this unit can

reproduce.

Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT

terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal.

Turn this unit into the standby mode, and

then turn on to reset the protection circuit.

Cancel the SLEEP timer function.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Connect the cords properly. If the problem

persists, the cords may be defective.

Press the EFFECT button to turn it on.

Use a different sound field program.

Set to the “OFF-7ch” position.

Select another program (or subprogram).

Select the appropriate position.

Select another program.

Refer to the instructions for the source

currently played.

Select the MAIN position.

Make output mode selections suitable for

your speaker system.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the

problem persists, the cords may be defective.

Make the GND connection between the

turntable and this unit.

The player should be connected to the unit

through the MC head amplifier.

Turn on the power to the component.

TROUBLESHOOTING

General

SYMPTOM

The remote control transmitter does not

work.

The remote control transmitter does not

function properly.

Learning cannot be made successfully.

(The TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator does not

light up or flash.)

Continuous functions such as volume are

learned, but operate only for a moment

before stopping.

CAUSE

The batteries of this remote control

transmitters are weak.

The internal microcomputer “freezes”.

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type

of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote

control sensor of the main unit.

The internal microcomputer “freezes”.

The batteries of this remote control

transmitter and/or the other remote control

transmitter are weak.

The distance between the two remote control

transmitters is too long or too short.

The signal coding or modulation of the other

remote control transmitter is not compatible

with this remote control transmitter.

Memory capacity is full.

The internal microcomputer “freezes”.

Learning process incomplete.

REMEDY

Replace the batteries with new ones and

press the RESET button on the remote

control transmitter.

Press the RESET button on the remote

control transmitter.

The remote control transmitter will function

from a maximum range of 6 meters, no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Change position of the main unit.

Press the RESET button on the remote

control transmitter.

Replace the batteries (and press the RESET

button for this remote control transmitter).

Place the remote control transmitters with the

proper distance.

Learning is not possible.

Further learning is not possible without

deleting unnecessary commands.

Press the RESET button on the remote

control transmitter.

Be sure to press and hold the function key on

the other remote control transmitter until the

TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator begins flashing

slowly.

Remote control transmitter

SYMPTOM

DSP parameters and some other settings

on this unit cannot be changed.

“INPUT DATA ERROR” appears on the

display and no sound is heard.

The sound field cannot be recorded.

This unit do not operate properly.

A source cannot be recorded by a tape

deck or VCR connected to this unit.

Noise from nearby TV or tuner.

The sound is degraded when listening with

the headphones connected to the compact

disc player or tape deck that are connected

with this unit.

CAUSE

The function “9. MEMORY GUARD” in the

SET MENU mode is set to the “ON” position.

A nonstandardized source is played back, or

the unit playing back a source is

misoperating.

It is not possible to record the sound field on

a tape deck connected to this unit’s

MD/TAPE 1 REC terminals.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen

by an external electric shock (lightning,

excessive static electricity, etc.) or power

supply with low voltage.

The source unit is connected to this unit

between digital terminals only.

This unit is too close to the affected

equipment.

This unit is in the standby mode.

REMEDY

Set to the “OFF” position.

Check the source, or turn off the unit playing

back the source and then turn on again.

Unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC

outlet, and then plug in again after about one

minute.

Make additional connection between analog

terminals.

Move the unit further away from the affected

equipment.

Turn the power to this unit on.

English

SYMPTOM

A loud hissing noise is heard when you

play back a source encoded with the DTS.

A percussive noise is heard when you

begin playing back a source encoded with

the DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

source encoded with the DTS, even though

the “AUTO” or “DTS” input mode is

selected on this unit.

No sound is heard when you play back an

MD onto which you have recorded a

source encoded with the DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

DAT onto which you have recorded a

source encoded with the DTS.

No sound is heard when you play back a

source (CD etc.) even though the currently

selected input mode is “AUTO”.

CAUSE

The player which plays back the source is

not connected to a digital audio signal input

terminal of this unit.

The “ANALOG” input mode is selected on

this unit.

If the “AUTO” input mode is selected,

depending on some sources, there may be a

case that a noise is heard while this unit is

identifying the format of input signal.

The DTS decoder built into this unit does not

function because the player has a digital

volume control and it is set at a position

other than “maximum”, “neutral” or

“ineffective”.

A source encoded with the DTS cannot be

recorded onto an MD.

Depending on a DAT deck, a source

encoded with the DTS cannot be recorded

onto a DAT.

In the “AUTO” mode, the DTS-decoding

mode cannot be changed to the normal

(PCM) digital signal input mode

automatically.

REMEDY

The player must be connected to a digital

audio signal input terminal of this unit besides

analog audio signal terminal connections.

Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn

on the DTS decoder built into this unit.

Set the input mode of the currently selected

input source to “DTS”.

Set the player’s digital volume control at the

maximum, neutral or ineffective position.

Press the INPUT MODE button on the front

panel or the input selector button (for the

currently selected source) on the remote

control transmitter so that “PCM” appears on

the display.

When playing back a source encoded with the DTS:

Notes

• It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with the DTS, so the player which plays back a source must

be connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only

a D/A converter is used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back a source, only a loud hiss noise will be heard.

• If you make a search (or skip etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with the DTS, the “PCM” indicator lights up on

the display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the normal (PCM) digital signal input

mode to prevent a noise from being output.

• A source encoded with the DTS cannot be recorded onto analog audio and video tapes, and also, an analog tape recorded with a

source encoded with the DTS cannot be played back.

The same result is obtained for MDs and DATs (depending on a DAT deck used for recording and/or playback).

Minimum RMS Output Power Per Channel

(When both channels are driven)

MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8Ω)

....................................................................... 110W+110W

CENTER (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8Ω) ........ 110W

REAR L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8Ω)

........................................................................110W+110W

FRONT L/R (1 kHz, 0.05% THD, 8Ω).................35W+35W

Maximum Power [China and General models only]

1 kHz, 10% THD

, 6Ω (When both channels are driven)

MAIN L/R........................................................150W+150W

CENTER....................................................................150W

REAR L/R.......................................................150W+150W

FRONT L/R.........................................................45W+45W

Dynamic Power Per Channel

(by IHF Dynamic Headroom Measuring Method)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only]

MAIN L/R (8Ω/6

Ω/4Ω)

(When both channels are driven).......... 150W/180W/240W

Dynamic Headroom

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only]

MAIN L/R (8Ω) ............................................................. 1.3 dB

DIN Standard Output Power Per Channel [Europe and U.K.

models only]

MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4Ω)

(When both channels are driven)................................ 180W

IEC Power [Europe and U.K. models only]

MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8Ω)

(When both channels are driven)................................ 120W

Damping Factor

MAIN L/R, CENTER (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8Ω)

...................................................................... More than 200

Input Sensitivity/Impedance (100W/8Ω)

CD/TUNER/MD

zTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX................... 150 mV/47 kΩ

PHONO MM.....................................................2.5 mV/47 kΩ

MAIN IN..................................................................1V/47 kΩ

Maximum Input Signal (1 kHz, 0.05% THD, EFFECT ON)

CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX.................................. 2.3V

PHONO MM ............................................................ 130 mV

Output Level/Impedance

REC OUT...................................................... 150 mV/1.5 kΩ

PRE OUT

MAIN, CENTER, REAR, FRONT ....................... 1V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (SPLIT L, R) (EFFECT OFF)

........................................................................ 1.2V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER (MONO) (EFFECT OFF)

........................................................................... 2V/1.2 kΩ

Maximum Voltage Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1% THD)

PRE OUT (MAIN L/R)..................................... More than 3V

Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

Output Level

(CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX Input: 50 mV, RL=8Ω)

.................................................................................... 0.2V

Impedance .................................................................. 100Ω

Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT

.............................................................................. 0±0.5 dB

RIAA Equalization Deviation (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

PHONO MM............................................................0±0.5 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX to PRE OUT (MAIN L/R),

1V............................................................. Less than 0.005%

PHONO MM to REC OUT, 3V................... Less than 0.01%

MAIN IN to SP OUT (MAIN L/R, CENTER), 40W/8Ω

................................................................. Less than 0.005%

MAIN IN to SP OUT (MAIN L/R, CENTER), 50W/6Ω

................................................................. Less than 0.008%

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX (Input Shorted 150 mV)

(EFFECT OFF) .......................................... More than 96 dB

PHONO MM (Input Shorted 5 mV) (EFFECT OFF)

....................................................................More than 86 dB

Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

MAIN L/R SP OUT.................................... Less than 150 µV

Channel Separation (Vol –30 dB)

CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1

/VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted

(EFFECT OFF) 1 kHz/10 kHz ......... More than 70 dB/60 dB

PHONO MM Input Shorted (EFFECT OFF)

1 kHz/10 kHz..................................More than 70 dB/60 dB

Tone Control Characteristics

Bass

Boost/Cut .................................................. ±10 dB (50 Hz)

Turnover frequency ................................................ 350 Hz

Treble

Boost/Cut ................................................. ±10 dB (20 kHz)

Turnover frequency ............................................... 3.5 kHz

Center Channel Graphic Equalizer

Frequency ................... 100 Hz/300 Hz/1 kHz/3 kHz/10 kHz

Boost/Cut ................................................................... ±6 dB

Q ..................................................................................... 0.7

Bass Extension (MAIN L/R) ............................. +6 dB (70 Hz)

Low Pass Filter Characteristics

SUBWOOFER (fc = 90 Hz) ................................. 24 dB/oct.

SPECIFICATIONS

English

CINEMA Equalizer

High-shelving filter

Frequency .......................................... 1.0 kHz to 12.7 kHz

Boost/Cut ................................................... –9 dB to +6 dB

Parametric equalizer

Frequency .......................................... 1.0 kHz to 12.7 kHz

Boost/Cut ................................................... –9 dB to +6 dB

Q ................................................................................. 1.85

Audio Muting ............................................................... –20 dB

Video Section

Video Signal Type

[U.S.A. and Canada Models].....................................NTSC

[Europe, U.K. and Australia models] .......................... PAL

[China and General Models] ............................ NTSC/PAL

Video Signal Level ............................................. 1 Vp-p/75Ω

S-Video Signal Level

Y ...................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75Ω

C .............................................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75Ω

Maximum Input Level ............................ More than 1.5 Vp-p

Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................ More than 50 dB

Monitor Out Frequency Response

.......................................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................... AC 120V/60 Hz

[Europe and U.K. models] ........................... AC 230V/50 Hz

[Australia model] ......................................... AC 240V/50 Hz

[China and General models]

........................................... AC 110/120/220/240V 60/50 Hz

Power Consumption

[U.S.A., Europe, U.K., Australia, China and General models]

.................................................................................... 500W

[Canada model]...............................................500W/650 VA

AC Outlets

2 SWITCHED OUTLETS

[U.S.A. model] ......................................... 120W max. total

[Canada, China and General models] ..... 100W max. total

1 SWITCHED OUTLET

[Europe, U.K. and Australia models] ............... 100W max.

1 UNSWITCHED OUTLET

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 180W max.

[China and General models] ........................... 200W max.

Dimensions (W x H x D)

[U.S.A., Canada, Europe, U.K. and Australia models]

.......................................................... 435 x 190.5 x 473 mm

(17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)

[China and General models (without side panels)]

.......................................................... 435 x 190.5 x 473 mm

(17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)

[China and General models (with side panels)]

.......................................................... 473 x 190.5 x 473 mm

(18-5/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)

Weight

[U.S.A., Canada, Europe, U.K. and Australia models]

................................................................. 23.0 kg (50.6 lbs.)

[China and General models (without side panels)]

................................................................. 23.0 kg (50.6 lbs.)

[China and General models (with side panels)]

.................................................................... 25.0 kg (55 lbs.)

Accessories....................................Remote control transmitter

Batteries

User function stickers

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

VV58000

Documenttranscriptie

UCA NATURAL SOUND CINEMA DSP 7ch AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 8 60 2 4 40 STANDBY/ON TAPE 2 MON /EXT. DECODER 0 –dB SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 PROGRAM TREBLE 0 l 2 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 EFFECT BALANCE 0 2 3 4 L5 VIDEO AUX SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD l 2 3 4 INPUT MODE REC OUT 5R VCR 1 TV/DBS VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO AUX OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI • Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. Model: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 6 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. 8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. 9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. 10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. 11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. 12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. 13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. 14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. 15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. 16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. 18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. This device is a composite system. The digital device component may not cause harmful interference. English SPECIAL NOTES FOR FCC COMPOSITE DEVICE (for US customers only) FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime (for US customers only) YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES After unpacking, check that the following parts are included. Remote Control Transmitter Batteries (size AA, R6, UM-3) User function stickers 1 Thank you for selecting this YAMAHA AV Amplifier. CONTENTS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................... Inside of the Front Cover SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ............................................... 1 FEATURES ........................................................................... 3 CAUTION .............................................................................. 3 NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER .................................................................... 4 PROFILE OF THIS UNIT ..................................................... 5 SPEAKER SETUP ............................................................... 8 CONNECTIONS ................................................................. 10 CONNECTING AUDIO/VIDEO SOURCE EQUIPMENT TO THIS UNIT ..................................................................... 10 CONNECTING SPEAKERS .............................................. 18 PLUGGING IN THIS UNIT ................................................. 22 CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS ......................... 23 FRONT PANEL ................................................................... 23 DISPLAY PANEL ................................................................ 25 ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT ............. 26 SELECTING THE OUTPUT MODES SUITABLE FOR YOUR SPEAKER SYSTEM (IN THE “SET MENU” MODE) ............................................................................................... 26 SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ............................. 29 USING DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) .............................................................................................. 45 PLAYING A SOURCE WITH AN EFFECT OF THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) .............. 45 ADJUSTING OUTPUT LEVEL OF THE CENTER, RIGHT REAR, LEFT REAR, FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS AND SUBWOOFER .................................................................... 48 BRIEF OVERVIEW OF DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ....................................................................... 50 ON SCREEN DISPLAY .................................................... 55 CREATING YOUR OWN SOUND FIELDS .................... 56 SELECTING AND EDITING PROGRAM PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 57 DESCRIPTIONS OF THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ................................................................... 58 SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER ......................................... 61 REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER ........................... 62 BASIC OPERATIONS (When the lid is open) ................. 62 LEARNING NEW CONTROL FUNCTIONS (When the lid is open).......................................................... 64 USING OPERATION CONTROL KEYS (When the lid is closed) ...................................................... 66 MACRO OPERATIONS (When the lid is closed) ............ 68 LEARNING A NEW FUNCTION ....................................... 70 MAKING A NEW MACRO ................................................. 71 CLEARING LEARNED FUNCTIONS .............................. 72 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................... 73 ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE ............ 32 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 76 BASIC OPERATIONS ....................................................... 39 TO PLAY A SOURCE......................................................... 39 TO RECORD A SOURCE TO TAPE (OR MD) (OR DUBBING FROM A TAPE TO ANOTHER) ............. 42 FOR SOUND CONTROL ON THIS UNIT........................ 44 2 ● 7 Speaker Configuration Main: 110W + 110W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20–20,000 Hz Center: 110W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20–20,000 Hz Rear: 110W + 110W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.015% THD, 20–20,000 Hz Front: 35W + 35W (8Ω) RMS Output Power, 0.05% THD, 1 kHz ● Digital Sound Field Processor ● Dolby Digital (AC-3) Decoder ● Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder ● DTS Decoder ● CINEMA DSP: Theater-like Sound Experience by the Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Surround or DTS ● Automatic Input Balance Control for Dolby Pro Logic Surround ● Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ● Speaker Output Mode Changing Capability ● “SET MENU” Mode which Provides You with 12 Titles of Setting Changes and Adjustments for Using This Unit in the Best Condition in Your Audio/Video System ● BASS EXTENSION Switch for Reinforcing Bass Response ● On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ● REC OUT Selector which is Independent of Input Source Selection ● SLEEP Timer ● Digital Audio Signal Terminals: 5 OPTICAL Inputs, 3 COAXIAL Inputs, 1 DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF Input, 1 OPTICAL Output ● 6 Channel Audio Signal Input Terminals for Connecting with an External Audio Signal Decoder etc. ● Video Signal Input/Output Capability (Including S Video Connections) ● “Learning” Remote Control Transmitter English FEATURES CAUTION : READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1. To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2. Install this unit in a cool, dry, clean place – away from windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust, moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers, motors). To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not expose the unit to rain or water. 3. Never open the cabinet. If something drops into the set, contact your dealer. 4. Do not use force on switches, controls or connection wires. When moving the unit, first disconnect the power plug and the wires connected to other equipment. Never pull the wires themselves. 5. The openings on the cabinet assure proper ventilation of the unit. If these openings are obstructed, the temperature inside the cabinet will rise rapidly. Therefore, avoid placing objects against these openings, and install the unit in wellventilated condition. Make sure to allow a space of at least 10 cm behind, 10 cm on the both sides and 30 cm above the top panel of the unit. Otherwise it may not only damage the unit, but also cause fire. 6. The voltage to be used must be the same as that specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than that which is specified is dangerous and may result in a fire or other type of accident causing damage. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than that which is specified. 7. Digital signals generated by this unit may interfere with other equipment such as tuners, receivers or TVs. Move this unit farther away from such equipment if interference is observed. 8. Always set the VOLUME control to “– ∞” before starting the audio source play. Increase the volume gradually to an appropriate level after playback has been started. 9. Do not attempt to clean the unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 10. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding common operating errors before concluding that the unit is faulty. 11. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (ie., vacation, etc.), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 12. To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug and antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 13. Grounding or polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization of an appliance is not defeated. 14. Do not connect an audio equipment to the AC outlet on the rear panel if the equipment requires more power than the outlet is rated to provide. 3 This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED; The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end closely. If so, set the switch to either end closely. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General Models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. A+ B MAIN CENTER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER FRONT EFFECT : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A OR B MAIN CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER FRONT EFFECT : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER VOLTAGE SELECTOR FRONT AC OUTLETS SWITCHED UNSWITCHED I00W MAX. TOTAL 200W MAX. REAR (SURROUND) FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT AND FULLY INSERT. THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN INTERFERENCECAUSING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS. (General model) NOTES ABOUT THE REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Battery installation Remote control transmitter operation range 2 1 Remote control sensor 3 Within approximately 6 m (19.7 feet) Battery replacement 4 If you find that the remote control transmitter must be used closer to the main unit, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with new ones. Notes ● Use only AA, R6, UM-3 batteries for replacement. ● Be sure the polarities are correct. (See the illustration inside the battery compartment.) ● Remove the batteries if the remote control transmitter will not be used for an extended period of time. ● If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come in contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. ● After you change batteries, make sure to press the RESET button inside the battery compartment. 30° 30° Notes ● There should be no large obstacles between the remote control transmitter and the main unit. ● If the remote control sensor is directly illuminated by strong lighting (especially an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.), it might cause the remote control transmitter not to work correctly. In this case, reposition the main unit to avoid direct lighting. This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. This unit has a total of 12 digital sound field processor (DSP) modes. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field (this will, of course, depend on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments. In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder and Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded video sources, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of DTSencoded audio and video sources. The operation of the Dolby Pro Logic Surround, Dolby Digital (AC-3) or DTS decoder can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including combined operations of DSP and Dolby Pro Logic Surround, DSP and Dolby Digital (AC-3), or DSP and DTS. English PROFILE OF THIS UNIT This unit also features a built-in automatic input balance control. This always assures you the best performance without manual adjustment. Digital Sound Field Processing What is it that makes live music so good? Today’s advanced sound reproduction technology lets you get extremely close to the sound of a live performance, but chances are you’ll still notice something missing, the acoustic environment of the live concert hall. Extensive research into the exact nature of the sonic reflections that create the ambience of a large hall has made it possible for Yamaha engineers to bring you this same sound in your own listening room, so you’ll feel all the sound of a live concert. Furthermore, our technicians, armed with sophisticated measuring equipment, have even made it possible to capture the acoustics of a variety of actual concert halls, jazz clubs, theaters, etc. from around the world, to allow you to accurately recreate any one of these live performance environments, all in your own home. Dolby Pro Logic Surround This unit employs a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder similar to professional Dolby Stereo decoders used in many movie theaters. By using the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo theater sound in your own home. Dolby Surround is encoded on a lot of sound tracks of prerecorded video tapes, laserdiscs, and some TV/cable broadcasts. When you play a source encoded with Dolby Surround on this unit, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder decodes the signal and distributes the surround-sound effects. Dolby Pro Logic employs a four-channel-five-speaker system. The Pro Logic Surround system divides the input signal into four levels: the left and right main channels, the center channel (used for dialog), and the rear surround sound channel (used for sound effects, background noise, and other ambient noises). The center channel allows listeners seated in even less-than-ideal positions to hear the dialog originating from the action on the screen while experiencing good stereo imaging. Dolby Digital (AC-3) Dolby Digital (AC-3) is a new generation of Dolby Surround sound system which is a spatial sound processing format developed for 35 mm film-movies by employing low bit-rate audio coding. Dolby Digital (AC-3) is a digital surround sound system that provides completely independent multi-channel audio to consumers. In multi-channel form, Dolby Digital (AC-3) provides five full range channels in what is sometimes referred to as a “3/2” configuration: three front channels (left, center and right), plus two surround channels. A sixth bass-only effect channel is also provided for output of LFE (low frequency effect), or low bass effects that are independent of other channels. (This is called the “subwoofer channel” or “LFE channel”.) This channel is counted as 0.1, thus giving rise to the term 5.1 channels in total. Compared to Dolby Pro Logic that is referred to a “3/1” system (left front, center, right front and just one surround channel), Dolby Digital (AC-3) features two surround channels, called stereo or split surrounds, each offering the same full range fidelity as the three front channels. By using the built-in Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of Dolby Stereo Digital theater sound in your own home. Sound of wide dynamic range reproduced by the five full range channels presents listeners much excitement that has never been experienced before. Precise sound orientation by the discrete digital sound processing expands realism that the original movie possesses. 5 Dolby Digital (AC-3) forms 5.1 channels as mentioned on the previous page, and moreover, it can also form fewer channels, for example 2 channel stereo and monaural. You may be able to find some 2 channel stereo and/or monaural sources encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in a market. If a 2 channel stereo source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is played back as the input source and the DSP program No. 10, 11 or 12 is used at the same time, the source is first decoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder into 2 channels, and then decoded with the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. In such a case, only the decoding of Dolby Pro Logic is shown on the display panel of this unit. Laserdisc and DVD are home audio formats that could benefit from Dolby Digital (AC-3). In the near future, Dolby Digital (AC3) will also be applied to DBS, CATV and HDTV. The ongoing release of Dolby Stereo Digital theatrical films now underway will provide an immediate source of Dolby Digital (AC-3) encoded video software. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Copyright 1992 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. DTS Digital Surround The DTS (Digital Theater Systems) system was developed to replace analog soundtracks of movies with six discrete channels of digital soundtracks, and now, it is installed in many theaters around the world. The DTS digital playback system changed the way we experienced movies in theaters with six discrete channels of superb digital audio. The DTS technology, through intense research and development, made it possible to deliver a similar encode/decode discrete technology to home audio surroundsound entertainment. The DTS Digital Surround is an encode/decode system which delivers six channels of master-quality, 20-bit audio; technically 5.1 channels, which means 5 full-range (left, center, right and two surround) channels, plus a subwoofer (LFE) channel (as “0.1”). It is compatible with the 5.1 speaker configurations that are currently available for home theater systems The DTS Digital Surround algorithm is designed to encode the six channels of 20-bit audio onto any laserdisc or compact disc (or DVD in the near future) with considerably less datacompression. 6 By using the DTS decoder built into this unit, you can experience the dramatic realism and impact of the DTS installed theater’s high quality sound in your own home. Laserdisc and compact disc (and DVD in the near future) are home audio format within which DTS can represent its high quality multi-channel audio. (In addition to movies on laserdiscs, many exciting new multi-channel music recordings will also become available in the form of DTS-encoded compact discs.) Manufactured under license from DTS Technology LLC. Additionally licensed under the following US Patent 5,451,942 & National Patent applications derived from PCT/US95/00959. Additional U.S. and Foreign Patents pending. “DTS”, “digital surround”, and “coherent acoustics” logos are trademarks of DTS Technology LLC. All rights reserved. Dolby Surround sound system and DTS system show their full ability in a large movie theater, because movie sounds are originally designed to be reproduced in a large movie theater using many speakers. It is difficult to create a sound environment similar to that of a movie theater in your listening room, because the room size, materials of inside walls, the number of speakers, etc. of your listening room are much different from those of a movie theater. English CINEMA DSP: Dolby Surround + DSP / DTS + DSP Yamaha DSP technology made it possible to present you with nearly the same sound experience as that of a large movie theater in your listening room by compensating for lack of presence and dynamics in your listening room with its original digital sound fields combined with Dolby Surround sound or DTS Digital Surround sound. CINEMA DSP The YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” logo indicates those programs are created by the combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Surround or DTS. Dolby Pro Logic + 2 Digital Sound Fields Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the rear surround side of the Dolby Pro Logic Surrounddecoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and emphasize surround-effect in the room, letting you feel much presence as if you were watching a movie in a popular Dolby Stereo theater. This combination is available when the digital sound field program No. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or “PRO LOGIC/Enhanced” of No. 12 is selected, and the input signal of source is analog, PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in 2channels. Dolby Digital (AC-3) or DTS + 3 Digital Sound Fields Digital sound fields are created on the presence side and the independent left and right surround sides of the Dolby Digital (AC-3)-decoded or the DTS-decoded sound field respectively. They create a wide acoustic environment and much surround effect in the room without losing high channel separation. With wide dynamic range of Dolby Digital (AC-3) or DTS sound, this sound field combination lets you feel as if you were watching a movie in the newest Dolby Stereo Digital theater or DTS installed theater. This will be the most ideal home theater sound at the present time. This combination is available when the digital sound field program No. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or “DOLBY DIGITAL (or DTS DIGITAL SUR.)/Enhanced” of No. 12 is selected, and the input signal of source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC3) (except in 2-channels) or encoded with the DTS. 7 SPEAKER SETUP Setting Up Your Speaker System This unit has been designed to provide the best sound field quality with a full seven-speaker system setup, using a pair of main speakers to output main source sounds, two extra pairs of effect speakers to generate the sound field plus one center speaker for dialog. We therefore recommend that you use a seven-speaker setup. A four-speaker system using only one pair of effect speakers for the sound field will still provide impressive ambience and effects, however, and may be a good way to begin with this unit. You can always upgrade to the full seven-speaker system later. In the 4 or 5 speaker system, the Digital Sound Field Processing is still performed, but the main speakers are used for both the main channels and the front effect channels. Use of the Center Dialog Speaker Is Recommended If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, it is possible to enjoy movie viewing without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Use of a Subwoofer Expands Your Sound Field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer and amplifier. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing signals at the subwoofer channel with high fidelity during playing back a source with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS decoded. You may wish to choose the convenience of a Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, which has its own builtin power amplifier. When playing back a source with the Dolby Pro Logic decoded, or playing back a source which contains centerchannel signals with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS decoded, dialog, vocals etc. are output from the center channel. Therefore, if you want to maximize the performance of your Audio/Video home theater system, it is recommended that you use a center channel speaker. Speakers and Speaker Placement Your full seven-speaker system will require three speaker pairs: the MAIN SPEAKERS (your normal stereo speakers), the FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS and the REAR SPEAKERS, plus the CENTER SPEAKER. You may also be using a SUBWOOFER. The MAIN SPEAKERS should be high performance models and have enough power handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. Other speakers do not have to be equal to the MAIN SPEAKERS. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high performance models that can reproduce sounds in full range for the CENTER SPEAKER, the FRONT EFFECT and REAR SPEAKERS. Place the MAIN SPEAKERS in the normal position. Place the FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS further apart than the MAIN SPEAKERS, on either side of and 0.5–1m behind and above the MAIN SPEAKER pair. Place the REAR SPEAKERS behind your listening position. They should be nearly 1.8m up from the floor. Place the CENTER SPEAKER precisely between the two MAIN SPEAKERS. (To avoid interference, keep the speaker above or below the television monitor, or use a magnetically shielded speaker.) If using a SUBWOOFER, such as a Yamaha Active Servo Subwoofer System, the position of the speaker is not so critical because low bass tones are not highly directional. 8 Main speaker Subwoofer Front effect speaker Rear speaker Center speaker 4 Speaker System 5 Speaker System Simplest system. Good for Audio/Video sources. You can enjoy widely diffused sound by only adding two additional speaker units at the rear. By the use of center speaker, center sounds (dialog, vocals etc.) are precisely localized. 1E. FRONT MIX—Set to ON-5ch. (See page 27.) 1A. CENTER SP—Set to NONE. (See page 26.) 1E. FRONT MIX—Set to ON-5ch. (See page 27.) 1A. CENTER SP—Set to LRG or SML. (See page 26.) 6 Speaker System Good for sound fields from 2-channel stereo sources. When a normal stereo source is played back with the sound field programs No. 1 through No. 6, a sound effect matching that of a 7-speaker system can be obtained. The addition of front left and right effect speakers produces a more effective sound field. 1E. FRONT MIX—Set to OFF-7ch. (See page 27.) 1A. CENTER SP—Set to NONE. (See page 26.) English Four Possible Types of Speaker System Configurations Recommended 7 Speaker System This is the recommended speaker system, providing the best sound effects. The rear speakers and the front effect speakers produces a 360-degree sound field, and the center speaker provides precise center localization. You can experience the amazing YAMAHA “CINEMA DSP” sound fields completely with the 7 speaker system. 1E. FRONT MIX—Set to OFF-7ch. (See page 27.) 1A. CENTER SP—Set to LRG or SML. (See page 26.) 9 CONNECTIONS Never plug in this unit and other components until all connections are completed. When making connections between this unit and other components, be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Also, refer to the owner’s manual for each component to be connected to this unit. CONNECTING AUDIO/VIDEO SOURCE EQUIPMENT TO THIS UNIT For connections with audio/video units, use RCA type pin plug cables with the exception described later. * If you have YAMAHA audio/video units numbered as 1, 2, 3, etc. on the rear panel, connections can be made easily only by connecting the output (or input) terminals of each unit to the same-numbered terminals of this unit. BASIC CONNECTIONS (for Audio Units) Turntable OUTPUT GND OUTPUT CD player (General model) 1 * DIGITAL (AC-3) RF SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO GND LD PHONO CD CD Tuner S VIDEO MAIN LD 1 OUTPUT TV/DBS 2 TV/DBS IN TUNER VCR 1 MD recorder, Tape deck 1, etc. DVD/ VCR 3 COAXIAL OPTICAL LINE OUT LINE IN CD 3 4 IN REC VCR 2 3 PLAY PLAY MD/TAPE 1 TAPE 2 REC OUT 4 IN REC DVD/ VCR 3 Tape deck 2 LINE OUT LINE IN LD MAIN TV/DBS SUB WOOFER DVD/ VCR 3 SURROUND DIGITAL SIGNAL * 10 1 : GND terminal (For turntable use) Connecting the ground wire of the turntable to the GND terminal will normally minimize hum, but in some cases better results may be obtained with the ground wire disconnected. FRONT OUT PLAY MD/TAPE 1 OUT CENTER EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT MONITOR OUT DVD/VCR 3 OUT CAN BE USED AS A SECOND MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED BY SET MENU. PAL NTSC English BASIC CONNECTIONS (for Video Units) LD player AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT (General model) AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL (AC-3) RF SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO GND LD PHONO CD CD TV/Satellite tuner S VIDEO MAIN LD 1 TV/DBS VIDEO OUT Video cassette recorder 1 AUDIO OUT VIDEO IN AUDIO IN VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO IN AUDIO IN Video cassette recorder 2 2 TV/DBS IN TUNER VCR 1 DVD/ VCR 3 COAXIAL OPTICAL CD 3 FRONT OUT PLAY MD/TAPE 1 4 IN REC VCR 2 3 PLAY PLAY MD/TAPE 1 TAPE 2 REC OUT 4 IN REC DVD/ VCR 3 LD MAIN TV/DBS SUB WOOFER DVD/ VCR 3 SURROUND DIGITAL SIGNAL OUT CENTER DVD/VCR 3 OUT CAN BE USED AS A SECOND MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED BY SET MENU. MONITOR OUT DVD player or VIDEO OUT video cassette recorder 3 AUDIO OUT VIDEO IN AUDIO IN PAL NTSC EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT 2 * Monitor TV VIDEO IN 2 * : PAL/NTSC switch (China and General models only) This unit is designed for use with the NTSC and PAL television formats. Set this switch to the position for the format your monitor TV employs. PAL: Outputs signals in the PAL format no matter which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an external video unit to this unit. Set to this position if your monitor TV employs the PAL format. NTSC: Outputs signals in the NTSC format no matter which format (PAL or NTSC) of video signal is sent from an external video unit to this unit. Set to this position if your monitor TV employs the NTSC format. Note Be sure to input a video signal which employs the same format that your monitor TV employs, otherwise a picture will not be played back normally. 11 Note If you wish to connect a second monitor TV (or a projector) to this unit, you can switch the DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO OUT terminal (and S VIDEO terminal also) to a second monitor out terminal for the connection with another monitor TV. (Refer to page 38.) S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT DVD player, etc. VCR 2 3 PLAY PLAY MD/TAPE 1 TAPE 2 OUT 4 REC IN REC DVD/ VCR 3 LD MAIN TV/DBS SUB WOOFER DVD/ VCR 3 SURROUND DIGITAL SIGNAL DVD/VCR 3 OUT CAN BE USED AS A SECOND MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED BY SET MENU. OUT CENTER MONITOR OUT VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT Projector For connecting with a monitor TV that uses a 21 pin connector for input (for Europe and U.K. models) Make a connection as figured below with a commercially available scart-plug connector cable. VCR 2 3 PLAY PLAY MD/TAPE 1 TAPE 2 REC OUT 4 IN REC DVD/ VCR 3 LD MAIN TV/DBS SUB WOOFER DVD/ VCR 3 SURROUND DIGITAL SIGNAL DVD/VCR 3 OUT CAN BE USED AS A SECOND MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED BY SET MENU. OUT CENTER MONITOR OUT EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT Monitor TV Scart-plug connector cable 12 AUDIO R AUDIO L VIDEO No connection English m Connecting to VIDEO AUX terminals (on the front panel) These terminals are used to connect any video input source such as a camcorder to this unit. VIDEO AUX AUDIO OUT R R AUDIO OUT L L VIDEO OUT VIDEO S VIDEO OUT Camcorder S VIDEO 13 m Connecting to digital (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) terminals If your CD player, MD recorder, LD player, DVD player, TV/satellite tuner, etc. are equipped with coaxial or optical digital audio signal output terminals, they can be connected to this unit’s COAXIAL and/or OPTICAL digital signal input terminals. To make a connection between optical digital audio signal terminals, remove the cover from each terminal, and then connect them by using a commercially available optical fiber cable that conforms to EIAJ standards. Other cables might not function correctly. Even if you connect an audio/video unit to the OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) terminal of this unit, you must keep the unit connected with the same named analog audio signal terminals of this unit, because digital signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to only analog audio signal terminals of this unit. You can switch the selection of input signals between “digital” and “analog” easily. (See page 41 for details.) * However, if you connect an MD recorder or DAT to this unit’s OPTICAL MD/TAPE 1 PLAY and REC terminals, it can record input sources connected to this unit’s OPTICAL digital signal input terminals. Notes ● When you connect an audio/video unit to both of the digital and analog terminals of this unit, make sure to connect to both terminals of the same name. ● Be sure to attach the covers when the OPTICAL terminals are not being used, in order to protect the terminals from dust. ● All digital audio signal input terminals are applicable to the sampling frequency of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. ● In order to make this unit perform a successful DTSdecoding, the DTS bitstream must not be altered, manipulated or corrupted in the process that it is sent from the DIGITAL OUT terminal of a unit playing back a source encoded with the DTS to a digital signal input terminal of this unit. TV/Satellite tuner COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT LD player OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT CD player OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL (AC-3) RF SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO GND LD PHONO CD CD S VIDEO MAIN LD 1 TV/DBS 2 TV/DBS IN TUNER VCR 1 DVD/ VCR 3 COAXIAL OPTICAL MD recorder, DAT, etc. CD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT 4 IN VCR 2 3 PLAY PLAY MD/TAPE 1 TAPE 2 REC COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT FRONT OUT REC OPTICAL DIGITAL IN DVD player, etc. 3 PLAY MD/TAPE 1 OUT 4 IN REC DVD/ VCR 3 LD MAIN TV/DBS SUB WOOFER DVD/ VCR 3 SURROUND DIGITAL SIGNAL OUT CENTER MONITOR OUT DVD/VCR 3 OUT CAN BE USED AS A SECOND MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED BY SET MENU. PAL NTSC EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT (General model) 14 If your LD player has a DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF signal output terminal, connect it to this unit’s DIGITAL (AC-3) RF SIGNAL input terminal. Audio signals encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) are input to this unit by this connection. * To play back an LD source with the Dolby Digital decoded, set the input mode of LD to “AUTO” or “AC-3 RF”. (Refer to page 41 for details.) Note DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck, MD recorder or VCR. To record an LD source, the LD player must be connected to the OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and/or analog audio signal input terminals of this unit. English m Connecting to DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF output of the LD player It is also necessary to connect the LD player to this unit’s OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and/or analog audio signal input terminals regardless of the DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF signal connection, for playing back an LD source with the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or the DTS decoded, or in normal stereo (or monaural). LD player DIGITAL (AC-3) RF SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO GND LD PHONO CD CD S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT DOLBY DIGITAL (AC-3) RF OUTPUT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT S VIDEO MAIN LD 1 TV/DBS 2 TV/DBS IN TUNER VCR 1 DVD/ VCR 3 COAXIAL OPTICAL CD 3 FRONT OUT PLAY MD/TAPE 1 4 IN REC VCR 2 3 PLAY PLAY MD/TAPE 1 TAPE 2 REC OUT 4 IN REC DVD/ VCR 3 LD MAIN TV/DBS SUB WOOFER DVD/ VCR 3 SURROUND DIGITAL SIGNAL OUT CENTER MONITOR OUT DVD/VCR 3 OUT CAN BE USED AS A SECOND MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED BY SET MENU. PAL NTSC EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT (General model) 15 m Connecting to S VIDEO terminals If your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. and your monitor are equipped with “S” (high-resolution) video terminals, connect them to this unit’s S VIDEO terminals, and connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the “S” video input of your monitor. Otherwise, connect the composite video terminals from your video cassette recorder, LD player, etc. to the VIDEO terminals of this unit, and connect this unit’s VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the composite video input of your monitor. Notes about the Video superimpose ● ● Note If video signals are sent to both S VIDEO input and VIDEO input terminals, the signals will be sent to their respective output terminals. If you watch a video source that is connected to both S VIDEO and VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display information are output from only the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal. When no video signal is input to either S VIDEO or VIDEO input terminals of this unit, signals of screen display information are output from both S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals with a color background. * For China and General models, if the PAL/NTSC switch on the rear panel is set to “PAL”, nothing will be output from either S VIDEO MONITOR OUT or VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal in this case. LD player Video cassette recorder 1 S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN AUDIO SIGNAL TV/Satellite tuner S VIDEO S-VIDEO OUT LD VIDEO OUT TV/DBS IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT Monitor TV 16 S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN DVD player or video cassette recorder 3 MONITOR OUT VIDEO IN VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT S-VIDEO OUT DVD/VCR 3 OUT CAN BE USED AS A SECOND MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED BY SET MENU. OUT VIDEO OUT IN DVD/ VCR 3 Video cassette recorder 2 English m Connecting an external sound processor, decoder, amplifier, etc. to this unit Note When signals input to these terminals are selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. This unit is equipped with additional 6-channel audio signal input terminals (for left main, right main, center, left rear surround, right rear surround and subwoofer channels) available for inputting signals from your existing amplifier, sound processor, decoder, etc. to this unit. To listen to a sound by reproducing signals input to these terminals, press the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button on the front panel once or more so that “EXT. DECODER IN” appears on the display. By doing so, the signals input to these terminals are sent to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals and OUTPUT terminals of this unit. (General model) DIGITAL (AC-3) RF SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO GND LD PHONO CD CD S VIDEO MAIN LD 1 TV/DBS 2 TV/DBS IN TUNER VCR 1 DVD/ VCR 3 COAXIAL OPTICAL CD 3 FRONT OUT PLAY MD/TAPE 1 4 IN REC VCR 2 3 PLAY PLAY MD/TAPE 1 TAPE 2 REC OUT 4 IN REC DVD/ VCR 3 LD MAIN TV/DBS SUB WOOFER DVD/ VCR 3 SURROUND DIGITAL SIGNAL OUT CENTER MONITOR OUT DVD/VCR 3 OUT CAN BE USED AS A SECOND MONITOR OUT, IF SELECTED BY SET MENU. PAL NTSC EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT MAIN OUT CENTER OUT SURROUND OUT SUBWOOFER OUT External sound processor, decoder, amplifier, etc. 17 CONNECTING SPEAKERS Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear of this unit. Main speakers Center speaker Rear speakers Right Left Right Left SPEAKERS CAUTION SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING. A MAIN CENTER B A+ B A OR B FRONT REAR (SURROUND) COUPLER MAIN CH PRE MAIN OUT IN CENTER OUT SUBWOOFER MONO FRONT REAR (SURROUND) SPLIT Subwoofer system OUT Right IN Left Front effect speakers How to Connect: Connect the SPEAKERS terminals to your speakers with wire of the proper gauge, cut as short as possible. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker wires is correct, that is the + and – markings are observed. If these wires are reversed, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. Caution Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ➀ Unscrew the knob. ➁ Insert the bare wire. 2 3 1 18 [Remove approx. 5mm (1/4”) insulation from the speaker wires.] ➂ Tighten the knob and secure the wire. <U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only> Banana Plug connections are also possible. Simply insert the Banana Plug connector into the corresponding terminal. Note on a subwoofer connection: One or two center speakers can be connected to this unit. If you cannot place the center speaker on or under the TV, it is recommended to use two center speakers and place them on both sides of the TV to orient the center sound at the center position. When using one center speaker, connect it to either the A or B terminals and set the CENTER SPEAKERS switch to “A OR B” (bottom position). When using two center speakers, connect them to the A and B terminals, and set the switch to “A + B” (top position). If, however, you will not use a center speaker, be sure to set the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode in the “NONE” position. (See page 26.) You may wish to add a subwoofer to reinforce low frequencies or to output low bass sound from the subwoofer channel when reproducing discrete signals. When using one subwoofer, connect the SUBWOOFER MONO terminal of this unit to the INPUT terminal of the subwoofer amplifier, and connect the speaker terminals of the subwoofer amplifier to the subwoofer. Center speaker English Note on center speaker connection: COUPLER MAIN CH PRE MAIN OUT IN CENTER Center speaker SUBWOOFER OUT MONO OUT IN FRONT REAR (SURROUND) SPLIT SPEAKERS CAUTION MAIN SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CORRECT SETTING. A CENTER B Subwoofer system A+ B A OR B FRONT REAR (SURROUND) CENTER SPEAKERS switch If you wish to obtain more presence in your listening room, the use of two subwoofers is recommended. To connect two subwoofers to this unit, connect one SUBWOOFER SPLIT terminal to the INPUT terminal of the amplifier driving a subwoofer, and the other SUBWOOFER SPLIT terminal to the INPUT terminal of the amplifier driving the other subwoofer, and then connect each subwoofer to the corresponding amplifier. COUPLER MAIN CH PRE MAIN OUT IN CENTER SUBWOOFER OUT MONO OUT IN FRONT REAR (SURROUND) SPLIT Subwoofer system Subwoofer system With some subwoofers, including the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, the amplifier and subwoofer are in the same unit. (Refer to page 21 for details about the SUBWOOFER MONO/SPLIT terminals.) 19 m IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Be sure to switch this only when the power to this unit is not on. Select the position whose requirements your speaker system meets. WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power to this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. IF THIS UNIT FAILS TO TURN ON WHEN THE STANDBY/ON SWITCH IS PRESSED; The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be set to either end closely. If so, set the switch to either end closely. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (Left position) Rear: The impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. Center: If you use two center speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. If you use one center speaker, the impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω or higher. Main: The impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. Front effect: The impedance of each speaker must be 6Ω or higher. (Right position) IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON A+ B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER FRONT EFFECT : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER FRONT EFFECT : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER VOLTAGE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SWITCHED UNSWITCHED I00W MAX. TOTAL 200W MAX. REAR (SURROUND) (General model) 20 The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. MAIN CENTER A OR B FRONT Rear: Center: If you use two center speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4Ω or higher. If you use one center speaker, the impedance of the speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Main: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. Front effect: The impedance of each speaker must be 8Ω or higher. The speaker connections described on page 18 are fine for most applications. If for some reason, however, you wish to drive main, center, front effect and/or rear speakers with your existing amplifier, etc., the following terminals are available for connecting external amplifier(s) to this unit. 3 CENTER OUT SUBWOOFER MONO OUT 1 1 FRONT REAR (SURROUND) SPLIT 3 4 5 MAIN CH PRE OUT/MAIN IN terminals The PRE OUT terminals are for main channel line output, and the MAIN IN terminals are for line input to the built-in main channel amplifier. The PRE OUT and MAIN IN terminals must be connected with jumper bars when the built-in amplifier is used. However, if you drive main speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, first remove the jumper bars, and then connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to the PRE OUT terminals. No connection is needed to the MAIN IN terminals. * Output signals from the PRE OUT terminals are affected by the use of BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls and BASS EXTENSION switch. 2 SUBWOOFER SPLIT terminals When using two subwoofers, connect their amplifier inputs to these terminals. Low bass signals that are output from the SUBWOOFER MONO terminal are also output from these terminals. However, signals from the left main and left rear channels are output to the SPLIT L terminal, and signals from the right main and right rear channels are to the SPLIT R terminal separately. IN 2 CENTER OUT/IN terminals The CENTER OUT terminals are for center channel line output, and the CENTER IN terminal is for line input to the built-in center channel amplifier. The lower side of CENTER OUT terminals and the CENTER IN terminal must be connected with a jumper bar when the built-in amplifier is used. However, if you drive one or two center speakers with an external power amplifier (for each), first remove the jumper bar, and then connect the input terminal(s) of the external amplifier(s) to either or both CENTER OUT terminals. No connection is needed to the CENTER IN terminal. SUBWOOFER terminals SUBWOOFER MONO terminal When using a subwoofer, connect its amplifier input to this terminal. Frequencies below 90 Hz distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are output from this terminal. Signals of LFE (low frequency effect) generated when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded are also output if they are assigned to this terminal. COUPLER MAIN CH PRE MAIN OUT IN English m To drive main, center, front effect and/or rear speakers with external amplifiers 4 FRONT terminals These terminals are for front effect channel line output. There is no connection to these terminals when you use the built-in amplifier. However, if you drive front effect speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals. 5 REAR (SURROUND) terminals These terminals are for rear channel line output. There is no connection to these terminals when you use the builtin amplifier. However, if you drive rear speakers with an external stereo power amplifier, connect the input terminals of the external amplifier (MAIN IN or AUX terminals of an amplifier or a receiver) to these terminals. Notes • Output level of signals from all of these terminals are adjusted by the use of VOLUME control on the front panel or MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote control transmitter. • If an external power amplifier is connected to the FRONT or REAR output terminals, the corresponding internal amplifier will be turned off and no output will be available at the SPEAKERS terminals. 21 PLUGGING IN THIS UNIT • After completing all connections, plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC outlet. • Unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet if this unit is not to be used for a long period of time. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON A+ B MAIN CENTER : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A OR B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER FRONT EFFECT : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A OR B MAIN CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A B : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER FRONT EFFECT : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER To AC outlet VOLTAGE SELECTOR FRONT AC OUTLETS SWITCHED UNSWITCHED I00W MAX. TOTAL 200W MAX. REAR (SURROUND) (General model) 2 1 * * * 1 AC OUTLET(S) (U.S.A., Canada, China and General models) .......................................................... 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS 1 UNSWITCHED OUTLET (Europe, U.K. and Australia models) ............................................................. 1 SWITCHED OUTLET Use these to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the SWITCHED outlets is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON switch or the provided remote control transmitter’s SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys. These outlets will supply power to any connected unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) is as follows. ● U.S.A. model: 120W ● Except U.S.A. model: 100W 22 The power to the UNSWITCHED outlet is not controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON switch or the provided remote control transmitter’s SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys. This outlet will supply power to the connected unit even if this unit is in the standby mode. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the UNSWITCHED AC OUTLET is as follows. ● U.S.A. and Canada models: 180W ● China and General models: 200W 2 * Voltage Selector (China and General Models only) The voltage selector on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. English CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS FRONT PANEL 1 2 3 NATURAL SOUND 4 5 6 CINEMA DSP 7ch AV AMPLIFIER DSP A1 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 DIGITAL STANDBY/ON LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 8 4 40 TAPE 2 MON TAPE 2 MON 2 60 /EXT. DECODER 0 –dB SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 3 3 4 8 9 0 3 4 0 3 4 4 L5 VIDEO AUX SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD 2 3 5 INPUT MODE REC OUT l 2 4 5 0 l 2 3 5 EFFECT BALANCE l 2 4 5 7 TREBLE l 2 PROGRAM 5R VCR 1 TV/DBS VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO AUX A B C D 1 STANDBY/ON switch Press this switch to turn the power to this unit on. Press it again to turn this unit into the standby mode. * When you press this switch to turn the power on, you will hear a click and a sound of the built-in fan rotating for a moment. Standby mode In this state, this unit consumes a very small quantity of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control transmitter. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control transmitter. 3 Display panel Shows various information. (For details, refer to page 25.) 4 TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button When this button is pressed once or more so that “TAPE2 MONITOR ON” appears on the display, sound source played on the unit connected to the TAPE 2 PLAY/REC AUDIO SIGNAL terminals on the rear of this unit is selected as the input source taking priority of the INPUT SELECTOR’s setting. When this button is pressed once or more so that “EXT. DECODER IN” appears on the display, sound signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals on the rear of this unit is selected as the input source taking priority of the INPUT SELECTOR’s setting. When this button is pressed once or more so that the display returns to a normal display mode, the above input sources are canceled. E F G 5 INPUT SELECTOR Selects the input source that you want to listen to (and watch). The selected source is shown on the display. 6 Master VOLUME control Simultaneously controls volume level at all outputs: front effect, main, rear, center, and subwoofer. (This does not affect REC OUT level.) * When the volume is decreased by pressing the MUTE key on the remote control transmitter, the indicator on the master VOLUME control flashes on and off. 7 PHONES jack Plug in headphones here for private listening. Sound signals from the main channels only are output here. However, if the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded, signals at all channels are distributed to the main channels and output here. PHONES 23 8 BASS EXTENSION switch E INPUT MODE button When this switch is pressed inward (ON), boosts bass frequency response at the main left and main right channels while maintaining overall tonal balance. If you do not have a subwoofer, the use of this switch will be effective to reinforce the bass frequencies. Switches the mode of selecting input signals between “AUTO”, “DTS” and “ANALOG” modes for sources that input two or more types of signals to this unit. (Refer to page 41 for details.) * For LD source, this switches among “AUTO”, “AC-3 RF”, “DTS”, “DIGITAL” and “ANALOG” modes. 9 SET MENU –/+ button Performs setting changes and adjustments for functions selected by pressing the NEXT button. F VIDEO AUX terminals NEXT button Selects functions in the SET MENU mode whenever pressed. 0 BASS and TREBLE controls Adjust low and high frequency response respectively for the left main, right main and center channels only. A PROGRAM selector button Sequentially selects the digital sound field processing programs in the or direction. Connect an auxiliary video or audio input source unit such as a camcorder to these terminals. If the connected video unit has a S video output terminal, connect it to the S VIDEO terminal to obtain a high resolution picture. The source connected to these terminals can be selected by the INPUT SELECTOR and REC OUT selector. G Control door When it is not necessary to operate controls inside the control door, close the door. To open the door B BALANCE control This control is effective only for the sound from the main speakers. This control adjusts the balance of the output volume to the left and right main speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by speaker location or listening room conditions. C EFFECT button Switches on and off the output from the center, rear and front effect speakers. When switched to off, the sound becomes normal 2-channels. * Even if the output from the center, rear and front effect speakers is off, when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded, signals at all channels are distributed to the main channels and output from the main speakers. D REC OUT selector Selects the source to be recorded to an MD recorder (or tape deck 1) or VCR 1 independently of the setting of the INPUT SELECTOR. However, when set to the SOURCE position, the setting of the INPUT SELECTOR decides the source to be recorded to an MD recorder (or tape deck) or VCR. 24 To close the door English DISPLAY PANEL 1 2 3 TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 4 5 6 1 indicators When the built-in DTS decoder is on, either dts indicator lights up. Red “dts” indicator lights up when playing a compact disc or laserdisc encoded with the DTS. Orange “dts” indicator lights up when playing a DVD encoded with the DTS. * On a DVD/LD combi-player, if you play a laserdisc encoded with the DTS after playing a Video-CD, DVD, etc., the orange “dts” indicator may light up. 2 Multi-information display Shows the currently selected DSP program, or information for several adjustments or setting changes made on this unit. 7 8 5 DSP indicator “DSP” lights up when the built-in digital sound field processor is on. 6 Digital audio input signal indicators These indicators show the type of digital signal currently input to this unit. When PCM digital audio signals are input to this unit, “PCM” lights up. When digital audio signals encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) are input to this unit, “AC-3” lights up. When digital audio signals encoded with the DTS are input to this unit, “DTS” lights up. 3 Input source indicators Show the currently selected input source by the arrow-shaped cursor. 7 SLEEP indicator 4 8 TAPE 2 MON indicator DIGITAL and PRO LOGIC indicators “ DIGITAL” lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital (AC-3) Decoder is on and the signals of selected source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is not in 2-channels. “ PRO LOGIC” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround Decoder is on. LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON Lights up while the built-in SLEEP timer is functioning. Lights up when the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) connected to the TAPE 2 PLAY/REC AUDIO SIGNAL terminals on the rear of this unit is selected as the input source by pressing the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button. 25 ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE USING THIS UNIT SELECTING THE OUTPUT MODES SUITABLE FOR YOUR SPEAKER SYSTEM (IN THE “SET MENU” MODE) This unit provides you with the following functions to distribute respective output signals to suitable speakers in your audio system. When speaker connections are all completed, select a proper position on each function to make the best use of your speaker system. * For details about the SET MENU mode, refer to pages 32 to 38. 1. SPEAKER SET 1A. CENTER SP 1B. REAR SP 1C. MAIN SP 1D. LFE/BASS OUT 1E. FRONT MIX 1F. MAIN LEVEL m DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 1A. CENTER SP 1B. REAR SP Choices: LARGE (LRG)/SMALL (SML)/NONE Preset position: LRG Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE LRG: Select this position when your center speaker is approximately the same size as the main speakers. SML: Select this position when you use a center speaker that is smaller than the main speakers. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the center channel are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “1D. LFE/BASS OUT”). NONE: 26 Select this position when you do not have a center speaker. The center channel sound will be output from the left and right main speakers. LARGE: Select this position if your rear speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction, or a subwoofer is connected to the rear speaker in parallel. In this position, full range signals are output from the rear speakers. SMALL: Select this position if your rear speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the rear channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (or the main speakers if the MAIN position is selected on “1D. LFE/BASS OUT”). 1E. FRONT MIX Choices: LARGE/SMALL Preset position: LARGE Choices: OFF-7ch/ON-5ch Preset position: OFF-7ch LARGE: Select this position if your main speakers have a high ability for bass reproduction. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels are output from the main speakers. SMALL: Select this position if your main speakers do not have a high ability for bass reproduction. However, if your system does not include a subwoofer, do not select this position. In this position, low bass signals (below 90 Hz) at the main channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals (if the SW or BOTH position is selected on “1D. LFE/BASS OUT”). OFF-7ch:Select this position if your speaker system includes a pair of front effect speakers. ON-5ch: Select this position if your speaker system does not include a pair of front effect speakers. Sound signals at the left and right front effect channels are distributed to the left and right main channels respectively, and output from the main speakers. 1D. LFE/BASS OUT 1F. MAIN LEVEL Choices: SW/MAIN/BOTH Preset position: SW Choices: Normal/–10dB Preset position: Normal MAIN: Select this position if your system does not include a subwoofer. In this position, full range signals present at the main channels, signals from the LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1A. CENTER SP” to “1C. MAIN SP” to be distributed from other channels are output from the main speakers. SW/BOTH: Select either the SW or BOTH position if your system includes a subwoofer. In either position, signals at LFE channel and other low bass signals that are selected on “1A. CENTER SP” to “1C. MAIN SP” to be distributed from other channels are output from the SUBWOOFER terminals. When the LARGE position is selected on “1C. MAIN SP”, in the SW position, no signal is distributed from the main channels to the SUBWOOFER terminals, however in the BOTH position, low bass signals from the main channels are output to both of the main speakers and the SUBWOOFER terminals. English 1C. MAIN SP Normal: Normally, select this position. –10dB: Select this position if the volume levels to the center, rear and/or front effect speakers are lower than the level to the main speakers even though they are adjusted to maximum. The volume level to the main speakers are decreased by 10 dB, so you can adjust the speaker output level balance properly. 27 m METHOD OF CHANGING SELECTIONS Operations should be made watching information on this unit’s display panel or the monitor screen. 1 PARAMETER/SET MENU NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 7 8 THEATER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 28 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL STANDBY/ON PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM LEVEL l2 TAPE 2 MON 4 0 SET MENU BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 3 4 5 l 2 4 5 0 3 4 L5 SYSTEM POWER ON 5R MASTER VOLUME TV VIDEO AUX SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD 2 4 REC OUT l 2 3 5 SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN EFFECT INPUT MODE BALANCE l 3 4 5 0 2 3 4 PROGRAM TREBLE l 2 3 2, 3, 4 TEST 1 2 60 /EXT. DECODER –dB PHONES PARAMETER 8 40 VCR 1 TV/DBS VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO AUX MUTE VCR STANDBY 3, 4 2 If you will use the remote control transmitter, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position on the remote control transmitter. Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the lid open. 3 Remote control Front panel SET MENU NEXT or PARAMETER Press once. SET MENU 1 Turn the power to this unit on. (If you want to display information on the monitor, turn the power to the monitor on.) Remote control Front panel TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY/ON or 2 4 Select the title “1. SPEAKER SET” by pressing the button figured below once or more (so that the title appears on the display). Remote control Front panel SET MENU Press “+” or “–” once or more so that the arrow-shaped cursor points the position you will select. Remote control Front panel SET MENU NEXT or NEXT or TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO Cursor TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX 28 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO 5 In the same way, select a proper position on “1B. REAR SP”, “1C. MAIN SP”, “1D. LFE/BASS OUT”, “1E. FRONT MIX” and/or “1F. MAIN LEVEL”. First select the title of function by following step 2, and then select a proper position by following step 4. English SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT This procedure lets you adjust the sound output level balance between the main, center rear and front effect speakers using the built-in test tone generator. When this adjustment is performed, the sound output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder, the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder and the DTS decoder. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be done at your listening position with the remote control transmitter. Otherwise, the result may not be satisfactory. Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the lid open. 1 2 PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX HALL 1 NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER 5 6 2 CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 l2 28 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL STANDBY/ON PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 8 4 40 TAPE 2 MON 2 60 /EXT. DECODER 0 –dB SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 3 4 5 l 2 3 4 5 0 l 2 2 VIDEO AUX VCR 1 TV/DBS VCR 2 3 DVD/VCR 3 4 L5 5 REC OUT SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD 3 4 4 5 EFFECT INPUT MODE BALANCE l 2 3 4 0 l 2 3 PROGRAM TREBLE VIDEO AUX 5R 1 HALL 2 CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 2 3 TAPE 2 MON ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT JAZZ CLUB 4 5 6 PHONO TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 LEVEL 9 / DTS SURROUND 11 EFFECT ON/OFF 12 PARAMETER TEST SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 4 3 MUTE VCR STANDBY 1 4 Front panel Front panel BASS EXTENSION VOLUME l6 20 l2 ON 28 OFF 8 4 40 Set to the “OFF ( 0 5 –dB Set to the “∞” position. 2 )”. 2 60 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch on the remote control transmitter to the PARAMETER position. Remote control Turn the power on. PARAMETER Remote control Front panel SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY/ON SET MENU or 6 3 Press the TEST key on the remote control transmitter so that “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the display to enter test mode. Front panel Remote control BASS l 0 TREBLE l l 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 0 BALANCE l 2 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 0 TEST l 2 2 3 3 4 4 L5 5R Set to the “0” position. CONTINUED 29 TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 7 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL STANDBY/ON PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 10 l6 20 l2 28 8 60 2 LEVEL EFFECT 9 / DTS SURROUND ON/OFF 12 11 PARAMETER 9 4 40 TAPE 2 MON 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR TEST /EXT. DECODER 0 SET MENU –dB SLEEP ON SCREEN SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 TREBLE l 2 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 PROGRAM 0 BALANCE l 2 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 EFFECT INPUT MODE 0 REC OUT 2 4 L5 5R MASTER VOLUME SYSTEM POWER ON VCR 1 TV/DBS 3 4 VIDEO AUX SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD l 2 3 TV VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO AUX MUTE 8 7 7 VCR STANDBY 8 Turn up the volume. Remote control Adjust the BALANCE control so that the effect sound output level of the left main speaker and the right main speaker are the same. Front panel BALANCE MUTE l 0 l 2 2 3 3 4 4 L5 You will hear a test tone (like pink noise) from the left main speaker, then the center speaker, then the right main speaker, then the right rear speaker, and then the left rear speaker, for about 2.5 seconds each. The display changes as shown below. Main (L) Center Main (R) 9 5R Adjust the sound output levels of the center speaker and the rear speakers so that they become almost as same as that of the main speakers. How to adjust: Pressing the + or – key adjusts the level to the speaker (except the main speakers) currently outputting the test tone. * Pressing the + key raises and the – key lowers the level. * While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. Remote control Rear (R) Rear (L) * The state of test tone output is also shown on the monitor screen by an image of audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DOLBY SUR. EFFECT LEVEL CENTER + 2dB * 30 If the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, you will hear the center channel test tone from the left and right main speakers. If desired, you can select a speaker to output the test tone by pressing the or key once or more so that “CENTER”, “RIGHT SURROUND” or “LEFT SURROUND” appears on the display. * While holding the or key pressed, the test tone is fixed on the selected speaker. * “CENTER” shows the center speaker is selected, “RIGHT SURROUND” shows the right rear speaker, and “LEFT SURROUND” shows the left rear speaker. * The output level of the selected speaker can be adjusted by the + or – key. Remote control 2 3 English 1 TAPE 2 MON ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT JAZZ CLUB 4 5 6 PHONO TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 LEVEL 10, 12 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 PARAMETER 11 TEST SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 10 For the front effect speaker level adjustment, press the TEST key on the remote control transmitter again so that “TEST DSP” appears on the display. 12 When the adjustment is finished, press the TEST key once again to cancel the test tone. Remote control Remote control TEST TEST Disappears A calibration signal should be heard from the main speakers and the front effect speakers in turn. Notes Once you have completed these adjustments, you can adjust whole sound level on your audio system by using the VOLUME control (or the MASTER VOLUME keys on the remote control transmitter) only. ● If you use external power amplifiers, you may also use their volume controls to achieve proper balance. ● If the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, in step 9, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. ● If there is insufficient sound output from the center and rear speakers, you may decrease the main speaker output level by setting the function “1F. MAIN LEVEL” in the SET MENU mode in the “–10dB” position. ● Main Front effect 11 Adjust the front effect speaker level by pressing the + or – key so that it becomes almost as same as that of the main speakers. * While adjusting, the test tone is fixed on the front effect speaker. Remote control * Pressing the or key makes the test tone fix on the left front effect speaker and the right front effect speaker respectively. This is helpful for you to check that each speaker is correctly connected to this unit. 31 ADJUSTMENTS IN THE “SET MENU” MODE The following twelve types of functions maximize the performance of your system and expand your enjoyment for audio listening and video watching. 3. DLBY DGTL SET 1. SPEAKER SET 1A. CENTER SP 1B. REAR SP 1C. MAIN SP 1D. LFE/BASS OUT 1E. FRONT MIX 1F. MAIN LEVEL 07. CINEMA EQ 08. PARAMETER INI 09. MEMORY GUARD 10. VCR3 VIDEO 11. INPUT MODE 12. DIMMER 3A. LFE LEVEL 3B. D-RANGE 4. DTS SET 4A. LFE LEVEL 5. CENTER DELAY 6. CENTER GEQ 2. LOW FREQ. TEST m METHOD OF SETTING CHANGE AND ADJUSTMENT PARAMETER/SET MENU TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER 7 CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR 20 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL STANDBY/ON PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 10 l6 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 l2 28 8 60 2 LEVEL PARAMETER 1, 2 4 40 TAPE 2 MON 11 TEST /EXT. DECODER SET MENU 0 –dB SLEEP ON SCREEN SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 3 4 4 5 PROGRAM TREBLE l 2 3 5 0 l 2 3 4 0 3 4 L5 5 SYSTEM POWER ON VIDEO AUX SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD 2 4 REC OUT l 2 3 4 5 EFFECT INPUT MODE BALANCE l 2 3 5R MASTER VOLUME TV VCR 1 TV/DBS VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO AUX MUTE VCR STANDBY 2 1 Operations should be made watching information on this unit’s display panel or the monitor screen. If you want to display information on the monitor, turn on the power to the monitor. 2 Select any desired position or edit parameters on the function. Remote control Front panel The use of the remote control transmitter is recommended for easier operation. When using the remote control transmitter, set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the SET MENU position on the remote control transmitter. Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the lid open. SET MENU NEXT or PARAMETER 3 SET MENU 1 Press once or more until the title of function on which you will make a change appears on the display. Remote control Front panel SET MENU NEXT or 32 Repeat step 1 and 2 to make a setting change or adjustment on any other function. Note A detailed adjusting method by using the remote control transmitter’s keys is described for each function on pages 33 to 38. When you make an adjustment on the front panel, note the following. ● +/– keys on the remote control transmitter are identical with the SET MENU +/– button on the front panel. ● key on the remote control transmitter is identical with the NEXT button on the front panel. In addition, note that the key on the remote control transmitter can be used to change selections in the order reverse to the key. English m DESCRIPTIONS OF THE FUNCTIONS 1. SPEAKER SET (Selecting the output modes suitable for your speaker system) Refer to pages 26 to 28 for details. (Once you have selected proper modes, you do not have to make a setting change until any alteration is made in your speaker system.) 2. LOW FREQ. TEST (Adjusting subwoofer level by using the test tone) The internal low frequency test tone generator is useful for adjusting subwoofer level to make the subwoofer sound match the sound of other speakers in your audio system. Operating procedure 1. After selecting this function (title) in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key to display the mode for adjustment. 2. Press the key so that the arrow points to “TEST TONE . . . . OFF”. Next press the + or – key to switch to the “ON” position. The test tone is heard from the selected speaker(s). 3. Press the key so that the arrow points to “OUTPUT . . . .”. Next press the + or – key to select the speaker whose sound you want to compare with the subwoofer sound. The test tone is output from the selected speaker. * Adjust the MASTER VOLUME keys so that the test tone can be heard at your desired listening level. * If “SUBWOOFER” is selected, the test tone below 90 Hz is output from the subwoofer. * The test tone will not be necessarily output from only the selected speaker(s). The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings on “1. SPEAKER SET” in the SET MENU mode. * Even if a source is being played back, the test tone is output instead of the source sounds. 4. Press the key so that the arrow points to “FREQ. . . . . . . . 88 Hz”. To confirm that the subwoofer sound matches the sound of other speakers, change the frequency of test tone one by one by pressing the + or – key. (Frequency can be changed from 35 Hz to 250 Hz, and last, all range (35–250 Hz) of frequencies are output.) Adjust subwoofer level with the control on the subwoofer so that the subwoofer sound matches the sound of other speakers in any range of low frequencies. Note This low frequency test tone can also be applied to check the bass response in your room. For the best bass condition, bass sound must be heard definitely at any position in your room. If not, change the setting of subwoofer or furniture in your room. 3. DLBY DGTL (DOLBY DIGITAL) SET Adjusting method After selecting the title “3. DLBY DGTL SET” in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key to display the title “3A. LFE LEVEL”. To select the title “3B. D-RANGE”, press the key.) Then make a key. (To select the title “3A. LFE LEVEL” again, press the setting change or adjustment with the + or – key. 3A. LFE LEVEL (Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel) ● Control range: –20 dB to 0 dB Preset value: 0 dB ● This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) contain LFE signals. Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals at other channels to output them from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signal level to the level of other signals are adjusted. (Refer to page 5 for details about the LFE channel.) 33 3B. D-RANGE (Adjusting dynamic range) ● Choices: MAX/STD/MIN Preset position: MAX ● This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is decoded. MAX: In this position, a source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is reproduced in the “compressed” dynamic range of the source suitable for low level listening. If you desire, you can adjust the dynamic range manually only when the STD position is selected. “Dynamic range” is the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds. Sounds on a movie originally designed for movie theaters feature very wide dynamic range. Dolby Digital (AC-3) technology can bring the original sound track into a home audio format with this wide dynamic range unchanged. In this position, a source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is reproduced in the original sound track’s wide dynamic range providing you with powerful sounds like a movie theater. Selecting this position will be more ideal if you can listen to a source in a high output level in a room specially soundproofed for audio/video enjoyment. m H-LEVEL CUT (High Level Cut Scale) Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Preset value: 1.0 Adjusts the dynamic range of high level signals of source. The larger the value, the more the range is reduced. The smaller the value, the range is more widened. m L-LEVEL BST (Low Level Boost Scale) Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Preset value: 1.0 STD (Standard): Powerful sounds of extremely wide dynamic range are not always suitable for home use. Depending upon the condition of your listening environment, it may not be possible to increase the sound output level as high as a movie theater. However, in a level suitable for listening in your room, the low level parts of source sound cannot be heard well because they will be lost among noises in your environment. Dolby Digital (AC-3) technology also made it possible to reduce an original sound track’s dynamic range for a home audio format by “compressing” the data of sound. Adjusts the dynamic range of low level signals of source. The larger the value, the more the range is widened. The smaller the value, the range is more reduced. Adjusting method Select the title H-LEVEL CUT or L-LEVEL BST by pressing the or key and adjust its value by pressing the + or – key. MIN: In this position, dynamic range is more reduced than in the STD position. Selecting this position will be effective when you must listen to a source in extremely low level. * In this position, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on a source. In that case, select the MAX or STD position. 4. DTS SET Adjusting method After selecting the title “4. DTS SET” in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key to display the title “4A. LFE LEVEL”. Then adjust its level with the + or – key. 4A. LFE LEVEL (Adjusting the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel) ● Control range: –10 dB to 10 dB Preset value: 0 dB ● This adjustment is effective only when the DTS is decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with the DTS contain LFE signals. 34 Adjusts the output level at the LFE (low frequency effect) channel. If the LFE signals are mixed with signals at other channels to output them from the same speakers, the ratio of LFE signal level to the level of other signals is adjusted. (Refer to page 6 for details about the LFE channel.) English 5. CENTER DELAY (Adjusting the delay of center sounds (dialog etc.)) ● Control range: 0 ms to 5 ms (in 1 ms step) Preset value: 0 ms ● This adjustment is effective only when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS contain center channel signals. Adjusts the delay between the main sounds (at the main channels) and dialog etc. (at the center channel). The larger the value, the later the dialog etc. is generated. In your audio system, the distance from the center speaker to your listening position may be shorter than the distance from the left or right main speaker to your listening position. In that case, sounds from the left main, center and right main speakers can reach your listening position at the same time by delaying the sound from the center speaker. 6. CENTER GEQ (Adjusting the Center Channel Graphic Equalizer) The built-in five band graphic equalizer is used to tailor, over a ±6 dB range, the overall output frequency response of the center channel. The five bands cover the complete audible sound spectrum and are centered on 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and 10 kHz frequencies. Adjustment should be done to each frequency individually. Adjusting method After selecting the function (title) in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key to display the condition of the equalizer. Then select a frequency with the or key and adjust its level with the + or – key. * Adjustment can be made by monitoring sounds using the test tone. To use the test tone, press the TEST key so that “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the display before making adjustment. The test tone is output from the center speaker(s). 7. CINEMA EQ (Adjusting the tonal balance of speakers) It is difficult to balance tonal quality of the main, center, front effect and rear effect speakers, because they may be different in type and size, and their setting positions and heights are also different. The built-in CINEMA Equalizer enables you to balance tonal quality of the speakers easily by adjusting tonal quality of the main/center, front effect and rear effect channels individually. This is also useful to compensate for loss of tonal response of the main and center speakers when these speakers are placed behind the projection screen (if you use a projector in place of a TV). The CINEMA Equalizer consists of the High-shelving equalizer (HIGH) and the Parametric equalizer (PEQ). The High-shelving equalizer changes high frequency characteristics smoothly, and the Parametric equalizer boosts or cuts any selected frequency smoothly. Adjusting method 1. After selecting this function (title) in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key. 2. Select the channels on which you will make adjustments by pressing the or key so that the arrow points the corresponding title. L, C, R ............... Left main, center and right main channels FRNT EFCT ....................................... Front effect channels REAR EFCT ................................................ Rear channels 3. Press the + or – key to turn the equalizer for the selected channels to “ON”. 4. Press the key repeatedly until the title of adjusting mode (7A. L,C,R EQ/7B. FRNT EFCT EQ/7C. REAR EFCT EQ) for the channels on which you will make adjustments is displayed. * The adjusting mode will not be displayed for the channels that are set to “OFF” in step 2. 5. Make adjustments for the selected channels. Select the item with the or key and change the value with the + or – key. HIGH: FRQ..................... Selects a turnover frequency of the High-shelving equalizer. GAIN ............................. Adjusts the maximum equalizing level. PEQ: FRQ ...................... Selects a frequency you will boost or cut. GAIN .............................. Adjusts the equalizing level on the selected frequency. * Adjustment can be made by monitoring sounds using the test tone. To use the test tone, press the TEST key so that “TEST DOLBY SUR.” or “TEST DSP” appears on the display. The test tone is fixed on the channels on which you make an adjustment and output from the corresponding speakers. It is recommended to make these adjustments together with the tonal quality adjustment of the center speaker on the function “6. CENTER GEQ”. Note Excessive increase of the GAIN level may cause an overload. It is recommended to adjust the GAIN level so that it becomes lower than the preset value. 35 m Preset value of the CINEMA Equalizer +3 GAIN (dB) L, C, R EQ HIGH: FRQ ..................... 12.7 kHz GAIN .................................... –3 dB PEQ: FRQ ....................... 12.7 kHz GAIN .................................... –4 dB +6 0 PEQ HIGH HIGH + PEQ (OVERALL) –3 –6 –9 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k Frequency (Hz) +6 +3 GAIN (dB) FRONT, REAR EFCT EQ HIGH: FRQ ..................... 12.7 kHz GAIN ...................................... 0 dB PEQ: FRQ ......................... 8.0 kHz GAIN .................................... –3 dB 0 HIGH –3 PEQ –6 –9 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k Frequency (Hz) m Frequency characteristics The following curves show frequency characteristics when the High-shelving equalizer (HIGH) is adjusted at the indicated values. HIGH: FRQ ....................... 1.0 kHz GAIN ..................... +6 dB to –9 dB +6 GAIN (dB) +3 0 –3 –6 –9 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k 5k 10k 20k Frequency (Hz) HIGH: FRQ .... 1.0 kHz to 12.7 kHz GAIN ......................... +6 dB/–9 dB +6 GAIN (dB) +3 0 –3 –6 –9 20 FREQ. POINTS 1.0k 1.2k 1.6k 2.0k 2.5k 3.2k 4.0k 5.0k 5.7k 6.3k 7.1k 8.0k 9.0k 10.1k 11.3k 12.7kH 50 100 200 500 1k 2k Frequency (Hz) 36 PEQ: FRQ ........................... 1.0 kHz GAIN ........................ +6 dB to –9 dB English The following curves show frequency characteristics when the Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) is adjusted at the indicated values. +6 GAIN (dB) +3 0 –3 –6 –9 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k 5k 10k 20k Frequency (Hz) PEQ: FRQ ........ 1.0 kHz to 12.7 kHz GAIN ............................ +6 dB/–9 dB +6 GAIN (dB) +3 0 –3 –6 FREQ. POINTS 1.0k 1.2k 1.6k 2.0k 2.5k 3.2k 4.0k 5.0k 5.7k 6.3k 7.1k 8.0k 9.0k 10.1k 11.3k 12.7kH –9 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k Frequency (Hz) 8. PARAMETER INI (Initializing parameters on a DSP program) You can initialize all parameter settings on a DSP program. Note that a DSP program has two or three subprograms; all parameters on both subprograms are initialized by this operation. Initializing method After selecting this function (title) in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key to display the DSP program numbers (1 – 12). A program number whose parameters has been changed is marked with “ ”. Press a DSP program selector key corresponding to the program number of which parameters you want to initialize. When initialized, the “ ” mark will disappear. * * 9. MEMORY GUARD (Locking DSP parameters and other adjustments) If you wish to prevent accidental alteration to DSP parameters or other adjustments on this unit, select “ON”. In this position, they are locked and cannot be changed. The following functions on this unit can be locked by this operation. • • • • • DSP parameters Other functions in the “SET MENU” mode ON SCREEN display key LEVEL key TEST key 37 10. VCR 3 VIDEO (Switching the DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO OUT terminal to a second monitor out terminal.) If you wish to connect a second monitor TV (or a projector) to this unit, select “MONTR” position. The DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO OUT terminal (and S VIDEO terminal also) is switched to a second monitor out terminal, so you can connect this terminal to the video input terminal of another monitor TV. Notes • Even in the “MONTR” position, the DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO IN terminal can be used as a normal video signal input terminal and the DVD/VCR 3 AUDIO SIGNAL IN/OUT terminals as normal audio input/output terminals. • If using the DVD/VCR 3 terminals for connecting a third video cassette recorder only, be sure to select “REC OUT” position. If the picture on the monitor is disturbed while the third video cassette recorder is functionning, “MONTR” position may be selected. If so, select “REC OUT” position. 11. INPUT MODE (Selecting the initial input mode of the sources connected to the TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3 input terminals) For the sources connected to the TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3 input terminals of this unit only, you can designate the input mode that is automatically selected when the power of this unit is switched on. AUTO: In this position, the AUTO input mode is always selected when the power of this unit is switched on. LAST: In this position, the input mode you have selected the last time is memorized and will not be changed even if the power of this unit is switched on. Operating method After selecting this function (title) in step 1 on page 32, press the + or – key. Next select the input source TV/DBS or DVD/VCR 3 by pressing the or key so that the arrow points to its name, and then select the AUTO or LAST mode by pressing the + or – key. * Refer to page 41 for details about switching the input mode. 12. DIMMER (Changing brightness of the display panel) You can adjust brightness of the display panel in five degrees. 38 English BASIC OPERATIONS TO PLAY A SOURCE REC/PAUSE A/B MD/TAPE 1 A CD TUNER 3 2 1, 6 A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC LD 3, 4 TV/DBS NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 VCR 2 C VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR DVD/VCR 3 l6 20 l2 28 PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM PRESET 8 4 40 TAPE 2 MON 2 60 /EXT. DECODER 7 0 –dB SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 PROGRAM TREBLE 0 l 2 l 2 3 HALL 2 CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 1 2 3 TAPE 2 MON ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT JAZZ CLUB 4 5 7 6 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 VIDEO AUX 10 VCR 1 TV/DBS 9 / DTS SURROUND PHONO 11 EFFECT ON/OFF 12 VCR 2 3 DVD/VCR 3 4 L5 HALL 1 TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD 2 4 5 REC OUT l 3 4 5 0 2 3 4 EFFECT INPUT MODE BALANCE A/B/C/D/E V-AUX LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL STANDBY/ON LEVEL VIDEO AUX 5R 7 2 4 PARAMETER TEST SET MENU 6 SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE Note: If you use the remote control transmitter, be sure to use it with the lid open. 1 4 Front panel VOLUME l6 20 VCR STANDBY For the source that inputs two or more types of signals to this unit, its current input mode is also shown. l2 28 To change the input mode, press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector key for the currently selected source on the remote control transmitter. (Refer to page 41 for details on switching the input mode.) 8 4 40 2 60 0 Front panel –dB Set to the “∞” position. Remote control INPUT MODE LD 2 or Turn the power on. Front panel Remote control SYSTEM POWER ON STANDBY/ON or TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX 3 Select the desired input source. (For video sources, turn the TV/monitor ON.) The selected source is shown on the display panel and the monitor screen. Front panel Remote control Input mode 5 Play the source. 6 LD LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO Front panel or Remote control VOLUME l6 20 MASTER VOLUME l2 28 8 4 40 TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO or MUTE 2 60 0 –dB Adjust to the desired output level. Name of the selected input source To select the tape deck connected to this unit’s TAPE 2 terminals or the source connected to this unit’s EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals, refer to page 40. 7 If desired, adjust the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls, etc. (refer to page 44) and use the digital sound field processor. (Refer to pages 45 to 49.) 39 When you finish using this unit Press the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel again or the STANDBY key on the remote control transmitter to turn this unit into the standby mode. Front panel Remote control STANDBY/ON or STANDBY To select the tape deck connected to this unit’s TAPE 2 terminals or the source connected to this unit’s EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals as the input source. Press the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button once or more so that the corresponding indication appears on the display. Front panel Remote control /EXT. DECODER TAPE 2 MON TAPE 2 MON or /EXT. DECODER TAPE 2 MON or “TAPE2 MONITOR ON”: Lights up for a few seconds just after you select the tape deck connected to the TAPE 2 terminals. “EXT. DECODER IN”: Lights up when the source connected to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals is selected. Note The input source selected in this way has priority over any other input source already selected. To select another input source, the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button must be pressed so that neither the “TAPE 2 MON” indicator nor “EXT. DECODER IN” lights up on the display. 40 Notes on input source selection ● Note that selecting a name of input source selects the source which is connected to the corresponding input terminals on the rear panel. * To select the source connected to the VIDEO AUX terminals on the front panel, select “VIDEO AUX”. ● The setting of the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button cannot be canceled by selecting another input source. To cancel it, press the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button again so that neither the “TAPE 2 MON” indicator nor “EXT. DECODER IN” lights up on the display. ● If you select a video input source without canceling the setting of the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button, the playback result will be the video image from the video source and the sound from the source selected by the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button. ● If a different audio source is selected with the input selector keys on the remote control transmitter while enjoying a video source, the sound from the newly selected audio source is heard, but the picture from the video source can still be seen. ● When you select an input source, the DSP program (or the state of no DSP program is used) which was used when the same input source was selected the last time will be automatically recalled. ● If a nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit playing back a source is misoperating, “INPUT DATA ERROR” appears on the display. This unit allows you to switch the input mode only for sources that input two or more types of signals to this unit. m For CD, MD/TAPE 1, TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3 sources: The following two input modes are provided. AUTO: This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power of this unit. In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. 1. Digital signal encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS, or Normal digital input signal (PCM) 2. Analog input signal (ANALOG) * For CD, TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3 sources, if digital signals are input from both of the OPTICAL and COAXIAL terminals, the digital signal from the OPTICAL terminal is selected. DTS: In this mode, only digital input signal encoded with the DTS is selected even though other signals are input at the same time. Notes on input mode selection ● For the TV/DBS and DVD/VCR 3 sources, the input mode selected on the function “11. INPUT MODE” in the SET MENU mode is selected when you turn on the power of this unit. ● To play back an LD source with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoded, set the input mode to “AUTO” or “AC-3 RF”. ● When you want to enjoy a source which has normal 2channel signals with a Dolby Pro Logic Surround program, select the ANALOG mode. ● In the AUTO mode, there may be a case depending on some LD players or DVD players that when you make a search on a source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS during playback and then playback is restored, sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital input signal is selected again. ● For sources PHONO, TUNER, TAPE 2, VCR 1, VCR 2 and V-AUX, the input mode cannot be changed because they input analog signals only to this unit. ● When the input source is changed to LD, CD, MD/TAPE 1, TV/DBS or DVD/VCR 3, or the input mode is changed, the currently selected input mode is shown on the display panel and the monitor screen. If changed to the AUTO mode, the type of selected input signal is also shown as figured below. TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX English Switching the input mode LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO ANALOG In this mode, only analog input signal is selected even though digital signal is input at the same time. Select this mode when you want to use the analog input signal instead of the digital input signal. m For LD sources: The following five input modes are provided. AUTO: This mode is automatically selected when you turn on the power to this unit. In this mode, input signal is automatically selected by the following order of priority. 1. Dolby Digital (AC-3) RF signal (DOLBY DIGITAL) 2. Digital signal encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS, or Normal digital input signal (PCM) 3. Analog input signal (ANALOG) AC-3 RF: In this mode, only Dolby Digital (AC-3) RF signal is selected. DTS: In this mode, only digital input signal encoded with the DTS is selected even though other signals are input at the same time. * However, if those operations are made when the test tone is output from this unit, the type of selected input signal will not be shown. (Only “AUTO” will be displayed.) Notes on playing back a source encoded with the DTS ● When you play back an LD or CD source with the DTS decoded (with the red “dts” indicator illuminated on the display) in the AUTO mode, a noise may be heard just after playback begins. To prevent such a noise, select the DTS mode. Be careful not to play back these sources in the ANALOG mode. If they are played back in the ANALOG mode, only a noise will be output from the speakers. ● If you play back a CD or LD source encoded with the DTS in the AUTO mode, this unit is locked in the DTSdecoding mode automatically to prevent the generation of noise possible in subsequent operations. In this state, the red “dts” indicator flashes. In this state, if you play back a CD or LD with normal (PCM) digital signals, no sound will be heard. To play back these sources normally, press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector key for the currently selected source on the remote control transmitter so that “PCM” appears on the display. DIGITAL: In this mode, only digital input signal is selected even though other types of signals are input at the same time. ANALOG In this mode, only analog input signal is selected even though other types of signals are input at the same time. 41 TO RECORD A SOURCE TO TAPE (OR MD) (OR DUBBING FROM A TAPE TO ANOTHER) REC/PAUSE A/B MD/TAPE 1 A 5 CD 2 3 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC LD TV/DBS NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 VCR 2 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR C l6 20 2 l2 DVD/VCR 3 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL STANDBY/ON PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 28 8 60 2 PRESET A/B/C/D/E 4 40 TAPE 2 MON V-AUX HALL 1 /EXT. DECODER 1 0 –dB 4 SET MENU BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 l 2 3 4 5 0 l 2 3 3 4 5 4 5 5 0 3 4 L5 5R TAPE 2 MON 5 7 VIDEO AUX SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD 2 4 REC OUT l 2 3 /EXT. DECODER 3 6 PHONO 5 TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER EFFECT INPUT MODE BALANCE l 2 3 4 PROGRAM TREBLE CHURCH 2 ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT JAZZ CLUB PHONES HALL 2 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 VCR 1 TV/DBS VCR 2 10 DVD/VCR 3 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 VIDEO AUX LEVEL PARAMETER TEST SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 1 SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 3 MUTE VCR STANDBY Note: If you use the remote control transmitter, be sure to use it with the lid open. 1 Set the REC OUT selector to the SOURCE position. 3 Play the source and then turn the VOLUME control up to confirm the input source. Front panel REC OUT Front panel SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD Remote control VCR 1 TV/DBS VOLUME VCR 2 l6 DVD/VCR 3 20 MASTER VOLUME l2 VIDEO AUX 28 8 4 40 2 Select the source you want to record. Front panel Remote control or MUTE 2 60 0 –dB CD 4 5 42 or Begin recording on the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) or VCR connected to this unit. If the second tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) connected to this unit’s TAPE 2 REC terminals is used for recording, you can monitor the sounds being recorded by pressing the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER so that the “TAPE 2 MON” indicator lights up on the display. English To record a source to tape (or MD) while listening to (or watching) another source Regardless of the setting of the INPUT SELECTOR, when you set the REC OUT selector to CD, the audio signal from your CD player can be recorded by your first tape deck (or MD recorder) which is connected to this unit’s MD/TAPE 1 REC terminals. Likewise, when the REC OUT selector is set to LD, TV/DBS, VCR 2, DVD/VCR 3 or VIDEO AUX, both the audio and video signals of the selected source can be recorded by your first VCR which is connected to this unit’s VCR 1 OUT terminals. REC/PAUSE 3, 5, 6 A/B MD/TAPE 1 3 A CD TUNER A DIR STOP NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER VCR 1 B B DISC CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 LD VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR TV/DBS l6 20 l2 28 PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 8 VCR 2 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL STANDBY/ON 4 40 TAPE 2 MON C 3, 5, 6 DVD/VCR 3 2 60 /EXT. DECODER 0 PRESET –dB A/B/C/D/E V-AUX SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 TREBLE l 2 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 PROGRAM 0 BALANCE l 2 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 EFFECT INPUT MODE 0 REC OUT 2 4 L5 HALL 2 CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 1 2 3 TAPE 2 MON ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT JAZZ CLUB VCR 1 TV/DBS 4 5 6 VCR 2 3 4 VIDEO AUX SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD l 2 3 HALL 1 PHONO TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER DVD/VCR 3 5R VIDEO AUX 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 LEVEL 1 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 PARAMETER TEST SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 3 MUTE Note: If you use the remote control transmitter, be sure to use it with the lid open. VCR STANDBY 1 4 Select the source you want to record. REC OUT Begin recording on the first tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) or the first VCR connected to this unit. SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD VCR 1 TV/DBS 5 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO AUX 2 3 Front panel Play the source. or 6 CD VOLUME l6 MASTER VOLUME l2 8 4 40 2 60 0 –dB or Remote control Front panel 28 Remote control MD/TAPE 1 Confirm the source by selecting it with the INPUT SELECTOR and turning up the VOLUME control. 20 To monitor the sound (and picture) to be recorded (or being recorded), select the tape deck (or VCR) being used for recording with the INPUT SELECTOR. or MUTE If you want to enjoy another source while recording, select it with the INPUT SELECTOR. Notes ● While recording, you can use any other VCR or tape deck not selected by the REC OUT selector to record an audio and video source selected by the INPUT SELECTOR. ● The audio and video signals from VCR 2 (or DVD/VCR 3) are sent to VCR 1 when the REC OUT selector is set to VCR 2 (or DVD/VCR 3). ● If the REC OUT selector is set to VCR 2 (or DVD/VCR 3), you cannot dub from your first VCR to the second VCR (or the third VCR), even if VCR 1 is selected by the INPUT SELECTOR. ● To dub the audio signal from your second tape deck to the first one, press the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button so that the “TAPE 2 MON” indicator lights up on the display (and set the INPUT SELECTOR to any source other than MD/TAPE 1 before beginning to record). 43 Notes on recording The settings of DSP and the VOLUME, BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE controls and the BASS EXTENSION switch have no effect on the material being recorded. ● Composite video and S video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source unit is connected to provide only a S video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only a S video (or only a composite video) signal on your VCR. ● A source that is connected to this unit between optical digital terminals only cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR other than the tape deck (or MD recorder etc.) connected to the OPTICAL MD/TAPE 1 REC terminal of this unit. ● ● ● ● Dolby Digital (AC-3) RF audio input signal cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR. To record an LD source, the LD player must be connected to the OPTICAL digital audio signal input terminal and/or analog audio signal input terminals of this unit. A source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit cannot be recorded. Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, compact discs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may infringe copyright laws. If you watch a video software that uses scramble or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, there may be a case that display information superimposed on the picture and/or the picture itself is disturbed due to those signals. FOR SOUND CONTROL ON THIS UNIT Adjusting the BALANCE control Adjust the balance of the output volume to the left and right speakers to compensate for sound imbalance caused by speaker location or listening room conditions. Adjusting the BASS and TREBLE controls BASS l 0 TREBLE l l 2 2 3 3 BALANCE 4 l 0 4 5 l 2 5 0 l 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 2 3 3 4 4 L5 5R BASS Note This control is effective only for the sound from the main speakers. : Turn this clockwise to increase (or counterclockwise to decrease) the low frequency response. TREBLE : Turn this clockwise to increase (or counterclockwise to decrease) the high frequency response. Using the BASS EXTENSION switch You can boost bass frequency response by setting this switch to the “ON” position. This switch is effective only on the sound from the main speakers. BASS EXTENSION ON 44 OFF Note These controls are effective only for the sound from the main speakers. This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor. The processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create an excellent audio sound field by selecting a suitable sound field program (this will, of course, depend on what you will be listening to), and adding desired adjustments. English USING DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) In addition, this unit incorporates a Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder and a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with Dolby Surround, and a DTS decoder for multi-channel sound reproduction of sources encoded with the DTS. The operation of these decoders can be controlled by selecting a corresponding DSP program including a combined operation of the YAMAHA DSP and the Dolby Digital (AC-3), the Dolby Pro Logic Surround or the DTS. This unit has 12 programs for digital sound field processing; 6 from actual acoustic environments from around the world, and 6 programs for Audio/Video sources. In addition, each program has two or three subprograms. All programs contain various parameters that can be adjusted to the listener’s taste. For details about digital sound field programs, refer to pages 50 to 54. PLAYING A SOURCE WITH AN EFFECT OF THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSOR (DSP) STOP B DISC LD TV/DBS NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 VCR 2 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 DIGITAL STANDBY/ON PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM C l2 28 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP 8 DVD/VCR 3 4 40 PRESET TAPE 2 MON A/B/C/D/E 2 60 V-AUX /EXT. DECODER 0 –dB SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 PROGRAM TREBLE l 2 0 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 EFFECT INPUT MODE BALANCE l 2 0 3 3 4 L5 5R HALL 2 CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 1 2 3 TAPE 2 MON JAZZ CLUB VIDEO AUX 4 SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD 2 4 REC OUT l 2 HALL 1 ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT 5 6 PHONO VCR 1 TV/DBS TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO AUX 7 2 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 LEVEL 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 PARAMETER TEST 2 SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 shown in “BASIC OPERATIONS” on page 39. 2 When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote control transmitter: If no program name is illuminated on the display panel, press the EFFECT button to turn on the digital sound field processor so that a name of DSP program lights up on the display panel and the monitor screen. Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the PARAMETER position. Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the lid open. EFFECT TV V V DVD/V V- PARAMETER SET MENU CONTINUED 45 LD TV/DBS NATURAL SOUND AV AMPLIFIER CINEMA DSP 7ch DSP A1 VCR 2 VOLUME INPUT SELECTOR l6 20 LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO TAPE 2 MON TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP DIGITAL STANDBY/ON PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM C l2 28 8 DVD/VCR 3 4 40 PRESET TAPE 2 MON A/B/C/D/E 2 60 V-AUX /EXT. DECODER 0 –dB SET MENU PHONES BASS EXTENSION NEXT BASS l 0 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 PROGRAM TREBLE l 2 0 l 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 EFFECT INPUT MODE BALANCE l 2 0 3 3 4 L5 5R VCR 1 TV/DBS VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 VIDEO AUX HALL 2 CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 1 2 3 TAPE 2 MON ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT JAZZ CLUB 3 VIDEO AUX SOURCE MD/TAPE 1 LD CD 2 4 REC OUT l 2 HALL 1 4 5 6 PHONO TV CONCERT CONCERT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER 7 8 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 LEVEL 3 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 11 PARAMETER TEST SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN 3 3 Select the desired program that is suitable for the source. When operating on the front panel: When operating on the remote control transmitter: a) PROGRAM HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 JAZZ CLUB 4 ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT 5 6 CONCERT CONCERT TV VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 Press once or more. 10 11 9 / DTS SURROUND 12 b) Select a desired subprogram by pressing the same DSP program selector key once or more, or by pressing the +/– keys. * The name of the selected program lights up on the display panel and the monitor screen. TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX PRO LOGIC DSP Subprogram name 4 ● ● LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO Program name If desired, adjust the output level of each speaker. (For details, refer to the corresponding descriptions on pages 48 and 49.) If desired, you can create your own sound field taste. (For details, refer to pages 56 to 60.) Notes ● Program selection can be made to individual input sources. Once you select a program, it is linked with the input source selected at that time. So, when you select the same input source next time, the same program is automatically called. ● If you prefer to cancel the DSP, press the EFFECT button. The sound will be the normal 2-channel stereo without surround sound effect. ● When a monaural sound source is played with the program DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, no sound is heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound is heard only from the center speaker. However, if the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, the main speakers output the sound of the center channel. ● When this unit’s Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, Dolby Digital decoder or DTS decoder is used, if the main-source sound is considerably altered by overadjustment of the BASS or TREBLE control, the relationship between the center and rear channels may produce an unnatural effect. ● When a source of signals input to the EXTERNAL DECODER INPUT terminals of this unit is selected, the DSP cannot be used and the EFFECT button also will not function. 46 English To enjoy a video source encoded with the Dolby Pro Logic Surround, the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS Note If you change the LD (or CD) being played back with the DTS decoded to another disc not encoded with the DTS when the red “dts” indicator is illuminated, playing back the newly selected disc will output no sound. In this state, the red “dts” indicator flashes to show that this unit is locked in the DTSdecoding mode. To play back the disc normally, change the current DTSdecoding mode to another mode by pressing an input selector key on the remote control transmitter or the INPUT MODE button on the front panel so that the red “dts” indicator turns off. When you select the program No. 10, 11 or 12, and the input signal of the source is 2-channel stereo, Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC3), Dolby Digital (AC-3) is automatically decoded. When some program is selected and the input signal of the source is encoded with the DTS, DTS is automatically decoded. The following indicators on the display panel show you what sound processing is being made. 1 2 To cancel the effect sound The EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFFECT ON/OFF key on the remote control transmitter make it simple to compare the normal stereo sound with the fully processed effect sound. 3 DIGITAL 4 5 PRO LOGIC DSP DIGITAL SOURCE AC 3 DTS PCM 1 Lights up when a DVD source encoded with the DTS is played back and the DTS is decoded. 2 Lights up when an LD source or a CD source encoded with the DTS is played back and the DTS is decoded. 3 Lights up when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is being decoded and the signals of selected source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is not in 2-channels. This indicator also lights up when the input mode is set to “AC-3 RF” even if no signal encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is input to this unit. 4 Lights up when the Dolby Pro Logic Surround is being decoded 5 Lights up when the Digital Sound Field Processor is turned on. To cancel the effect sound and monitor only the main sound, press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button. Press the EFFECT ON/OFF key or the EFFECT button a second time to restore the effect sound. Front panel EFFECT EFFECT Notes The Dolby Digital (AC-3) will not be decoded to the source that is not encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3). The DTS will not be decoded to the source that is not encoded with the DTS. ● If the input signals of source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) are in 2-channels only, the sound processing for them is similar to that for analog or PCM audio signals. ON/OFF or Notes If the effect sound is canceled when signals encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS are input to this unit, signals of all channels are mixed and are output from the main speakers. ● ● If the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key is pressed to turn effect sounds OFF when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded, it may happen that sound is output faintly or not output normally depending on a source. In that case, press the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key to turn effect sounds ON, or use input signals not encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS. ● If the EFFECT button or the EFFECT ON/OFF key is pressed to turn effect sounds OFF when the Dolby Digital (AC-3) is decoded, the sampling frequency and channel formation of the decoded signal is shown on the display panel. In addition, for the program No. 10, 11 and 12, the name of the selected subprogram on the display panel or the monitor screen will change according to the type of decoding. (For details, refer to pages 53 to 54.) ● Remote control ex.) EFFECT OFF fs=48k in : 3/2 Sampling frequency is 48 kHz. Three channels at the front Two channels at the rear * If the input source is a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source, “K” is shown at the head of channel formation. 47 ADJUSTING OUTPUT LEVEL OF THE CENTER, RIGHT REAR, LEFT REAR, FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS AND SUBWOOFER If desired, you can adjust the sound output level of the each speaker even if the output level is already set in “SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on pages 29 to 31. CENTER Note: These adjustments can be made only when the effect DSP sound is on. If none of the indicators , , DIGITAL PRO LOGIC are illuminated on the display and panel, press the EFFECT button on the front panel or the EFFECT ON/OFF key on the remote control transmitter so that at least one of those indicators lights up on the display panel. (Center speaker output level) LS/RS (Left and right rear speaker output level) FRONT (Front effect speaker output level) SWFR (Subwoofer output level) Method of adjustment This adjustment can be made only by using the remote control transmitter. Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the lid open. 1 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch on the remote control transmitter to the PARAMETER position. 4 Adjust the level on the selected speaker(s). PARAMETER SET MENU 2 LEVEL 5 3 Press once or more until the name of speaker(s) whose level you want to adjust appears on the display. LEVEL or Whenever pressed, the selection changes as the above chart shows. * Pressing the key on the remote control transmitter changes the selection in the reverse order. 48 Repeat step 2 and 3 to make adjustments on other speaker(s). Control range (dB) Preset value CENTER RIGHT SURROUND (RS) LEFT SURROUND (LS) SUBWOOFER (SWFR) FRONT MUTE, –40 to +10 MUTE, –40 to +10 MUTE, –40 to +10 MUTE, –20 to 0 MUTE, –40 to +10 0 0 0 0 0 Notes ● In this way, the output level of left rear and right rear speakers are adjusted at the same time, keeping the difference of level between them unchanged. To adjust each level of them respectively, follow the method of “SPEAKER BALANCE ADJUSTMENT” on pages 29 to 31. ● If the function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode is set in the “NONE” position, the sound output level of the center speaker cannot be adjusted. This is because in this mode, the center sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. ● Once the output level is adjusted, the level value will be the same in all the digital sound field programs. ● English Speakers The value of each speaker output level you set the last time will remain memorized even when this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is kept disconnected for more than one week, these values will be automatically changed back to the original factory settings. 49 BRIEF OVERVIEW OF DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. The data for these sound fields were recorded at actual locations using sophisticated sound field measurement equipment. Note The channel level balance between the left and right rear effect speakers may vary depending on the sound field you are listening to. This is due to the fact that most of these sound field recreations are actual acoustic environments. Program No. 1 to 6: Hi-Fi DSP programs (for audio sources) ● ● ● DSP When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( ) Speaker output: main, rear, front effect When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( Speaker output: main, center, rear, front effect DSP When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( ) Speaker output: main, center, rear, front effect No. 1 2 50 PROGRAM CONCERT HALL 1 CONCERT HALL 2 SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) DIGITAL DSP ) FEATURE Hall A in Europe This is a large fan-shaped concert hall in Munich which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the right and left walls, and sounds spread finely and beautifully. Hall B in Europe This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior except the ceiling is made of wood, including mahogany reflective panels. Special reflective paneling above the stage produces strong frontal reflections which tend to reinforce the direct sound from the stage. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. Hall C in Europe A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections. Those reflections and the reflections from all directions of the hall produce a very full, rich sound. Hall D in U.S.A. This is a large 2600-seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, suggesting an American taste. Sound of the middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reproduced. Hall E in Europe A classic large shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 2200 seats. It has a circular stage and seats located behind the stage. Live Concert A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. You will experience the sound field with a great deal of presence sitting at about the center position near the stage. This sound field is also effective for karaoke. This is because you feel as if you are standing on a real stage. 3 4 5 6 PROGRAM CHURCH JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) FEATURE Tokyo The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate reverberations. This is ideal for reproducing church music played by a pipe organ etc. Freiburg This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high pointed dome and columns along the sides. This interior produces very long reverberations. Royaumont This program features a sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of the monastery, a beautiful medieval Gothic structure located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. The dome-like spaces in the ceiling formed by the supporting pillars cause reverberations to echo and create a beautiful, lingering tone. Village Gate A jazz club in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The reflection pattern is similar to that of a small hall. Village Vanguard A traditional New York jazz club located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located in a corner. This program does not produce nearly as many reflections as the concert hall or church programs, but creates an intimate “close-to-the-music” feel. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line,” a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. The Roxy Theatre The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. Warehouse Loft This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections by the wall. Arena This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, and extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena theater. Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a very lively city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. Party This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties where you can hear the sound directly from the rear as well, thus realizing music enjoyment over a wide area. Game/Amusement This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds etc. whichever kind of source is used, stereo or monaural. You can enjoy video games with much power and presence. English No. 51 Program No. 7 to 12: CINEMA-DSP programs (for Audio/Video sources) ● These programs use the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, the Dolby Digital decoder or the DTS decoder. ● Speaker output for each program is as follows. No. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11: main, center, rear, front effect No. 12 (Normal): main, center, rear No. 12 (Enhanced): main, center, rear, front effect ● For program No. 7, 8 and 9 only, indicators light up as follows. DSP When the input signal is analog or PCM audio: ( ) When the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital (not in 2 channels): ( DSP When the input signal is encoded with the DTS: ( ) No. 7 8 9 52 PROGRAM CONCERT VIDEO 1 CONCERT VIDEO 2 TV THEATER SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) DIGITAL DSP ) FEATURE Pop/Rock This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel that you are in the midst of the action, as if attending an actual jazz or rock concert. The indirect sound constituent spreads on the surround side of the sound field by the use of data of a large round hall for the surround side, so the image space around the screen and the sound space are fully expanded. DJ With this program, the voice of a disc jockey sounds more clearly, and music entertains you with a rich sound field feeling. Classical/Opera This program provides excellent depth of vocals and overall clarity, restraining excessive reverberation. For opera, the orchestra pit and the stage are ideally combined, letting you feel a full presence sound. The rear surround side of the sound field is relatively moderated, however, it reproduces beautiful sound by the use of the data of a concert hall. You will not be tired from long watching of an opera. Pavilion This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the live sound field unique to a pavilion, and helps to make a concert scene more exciting. Mono Movie This program is for reproducing monaural video sources (old movies etc.). Monaural sounds are reproduced with much presence by the front presence side of the sound field and optimum reverberation effect. The use of the center speaker makes conversations more audible, obtaining a pleasant mix of conversations and picture. Variety/Sports Though the front presence side of the sound field is relatively narrow, the rear surround side employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as the news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, however, spreading of them to the rear side is properly restrained. Program No. 10 to 11 are suitable for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with the Dolby Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with the DTS (bearing the “dts” logo). No. 10 PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER 1 SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) 70 mm Spectacle DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels. English ● FEATURE This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, giving both the video and the sound field incredible reality. Any kind of video sources encoded with the Dolby Surround or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions) are ideal for use with this program. DGTL Spectacle DSP DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS Spectacle DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the DTS . 70 mm Sci-Fi DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels. DGTL Sci-Fi DSP DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound design of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital (AC-3) and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DTS Sci-Fi DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the DTS. 11 MOVIE THEATER 2 70 mm Adventure DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels. DGTL Adventure DSP DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS Adventure DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the DTS. 70 mm General DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels. DGTL General DSP DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest multi-track films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. The data of the sound field of an opera house are used for the front presence side, so the three dimensional feeling of the sound field is emphasized, and dialog is precisely oriented on the screen. By using the data of the sound field of a concert hall on the rear surround side, powerfull reverberations are generated. You can enjoy watching action, adventure movies, etc. with much presence. This program is for reproducing sounds on a multi-track film, and characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The front presence side of the sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround side, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. DTS General DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the DTS. 53 ● Program No. 12 is for reproducing video discs, video tapes and similar sources which are encoded with the Dolby Surround (bearing the “DOLBY SURROUND” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” logo) or encoded with the DTS (bearing the “dts” logo). No. 12 PROGRAM /DTS SURROUND SUBPROGRAM (TYPE) FEATURE PRO LOGIC/Normal ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels. The built-in Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder or the DTS decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects of a source encoded with the Dolby Surround or the DTS. The realization of a highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. DIGITAL ) DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal ( Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the DTS. PRO LOGIC/Enhanced DSP ( PRO LOGIC ) Functions when the input signal is analog or PCM audio or encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) in 2 channels. DOLBY DIGITAL/Enhanced DSP DIGITAL ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the Dolby Digital not in 2 channels. This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the newest film theater. The digital sound field processing and the Dolby Surround decoding or the DTS decoding are precisely performed without altering the originally designed sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field fold the viewer naturally from the rear to the left and right and toward the screen. DTS DIGITAL SUR./Enhanced DSP ( ) Functions when the input signal is encoded with the DTS. Note: If the “NONE” position is selected on “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode, no sound is output from the center speaker(s). 54 If you connect your video cassette recorder, LD player, video monitor, etc. to this unit, you can take advantage of this unit’s capability to display program titles, parameter data and information for various setting changes and adjustments on your video monitor’s screen. This information will be superimposed over the video image. If there is no video source connected or it is turned off, the information will be displayed over a blue colored background. Selecting a type of display English ON SCREEN DISPLAY You can change the type of display showing various information on the monitor’s screen by pressing the ON SCREEN display key on the remote control transmitter. Whenever pressed, the screen changes to a full display, a simple display and no display in turn. A B C ON SCREEN / CONCERT HALL 1 P01 Hall A in Europe / EFCT TRIM . . . . 0dB / INIT. DLY . . . . 30ms ROOM SIZE . . . . 1.0/ LIVENESS . . . . . . . 5 REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER (Example) Full display / CONCERT HALL 1 P01 Hall A in Europe / EFCT TRIM . . . . 0dB / INIT. DLY . . . . 30ms ROOM SIZE . . . . 1.0/ LIVENESS . . . . . . . 5 Note: The program titles, parameter data and other information are also displayed on the display panel of this unit. Simple display / P01 CONCERT HALL 1 Hall A in Europe Goes off after being displayed for several seconds. Notes ● When making a setting change or adjustment in the SET MENU mode, or making speaker balance adjustment by using the test tone, information is fully displayed on the monitor’s screen even if another type of display is currently selected. ● Information displayed on the monitor’s screen in this way cannot be recorded by a VCR. 55 CREATING YOUR OWN SOUND FIELDS WHAT IS A SOUND FIELD? In order to explain the impressive functions of the DSP, we need to first understand what a sound field really is. What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. We can even tell whether it is highly reflective with steel and glass surfaces, or more absorbent with wood panels, carpeting and curtains. THE ELEMENTS OF A SOUND FIELD In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: (1) Early Reflections. Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms — 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only—for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 58 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. (2) Reverberations. These are caused by reflections from more than one surface—walls, ceiling, the back of the room—so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the DSP reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the DSP. 56 DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are preset with values precisely calculated by Yamaha to create the sound field unique for the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing values of parameters, however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Even if this unit is in the standby mode, your custom sound fields will remain in the DSP’s memory for about two weeks. The following page details how to make your own sound fields. In addition to the “TYPE” parameter which selects the subprograms within each DSP program (e.g. “Hall A in Europe”, “Hall B in Europe” and “Hall C in Europe” for program 1, “HALL 1”), each program also has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to create precisely the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the “early reflections”—that is, the first few widely spaced reflections you hear after the direct sound. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you hear. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out quicker, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The DSP parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls and rooms provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. Refer to “DESCRIPTIONS OF THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS” on pages 58 to 60 for a description of what each parameter does, how it effects the sound, and its control range. English SELECTING AND EDITING PROGRAM PARAMETERS This adjustment can be made only by using the remote control transmitter watching the monitor screen or the display panel. Note It is recommended to watch the monitor screen for making adjustments more easily than to watch the display panel. 1 Set the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch to the PARAMETER position. Note: Be sure to use the remote control transmitter with the lid open. 4 Select a desired subprogram. HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 JAZZ CLUB PARAMETER 4 ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT 5 6 CONCERT CONCERT TV VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER 7 SET MENU 10 2 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 11 or 9 / DTS SURROUND 12 Press the button for the currently selected program once or more. Turn your monitor on. If the currently selected type of display is not the full display, press the ON SCREEN display key to call the full display. ON SCREEN 5 3 Select the parameter which you want to edit. If no DSP program is selected, select a desired program. HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 JAZZ CLUB 4 ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT 5 6 6 CONCERT CONCERT TV VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 Change the value on the selected parameter to create the effect you want. 9 / DTS SURROUND 11 12 The selected program name and its parameters will be displayed on the monitor screen. The arrow-shaped cursor points to the subprogram name. / CONCERT HALL 1 P01 Hall A in Europe / EFCT TRIM . . . . 0dB / INIT. DLY . . . . 30ms ROOM SIZE . . . . 1.0/ LIVENESS . . . . . . . 5 Subprogram “+” increases the value of the selected parameter, and “–” decreases the value of the selected parameter. In both cases you can hold the key down for continuous incrementing or decrementing. The display will pause for a moment at the initial value of the parameter as a reminder. (On the monitor screen, mark at the head of parameter name disappears at the initial value of the parameter.) * Notes ● For details about parameters, refer to pages 58 to 60. ● Parameter edits made in this way will remain in effect even with power cut due to power failure or the power plug disconnected from the AC outlet for up to about two weeks, after which all parameters, as well as other adjustments or setting changes on this unit, will return to their initial values or conditions. 57 DESCRIPTIONS OF THE DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ● ROOM SIZE P. ROOM SIZE (Presence Room Size) How it Affects the Sound: Changes the apparent size of the music venue. The larger the value, the larger the simulated room will sound. Adjusts the apparent space size of the front presence sound field. The larger the value, the longer the interval between reflections becomes, which increases the depth of the sound source. What it Does: Adjusts the timing between the early reflections. Early reflections are the first group of reflections you hear before the subsequent, dense reverberation begins. S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Adjusts the apparent space size of the rear surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 Standard setting is 1.0. Changing this parameter from 1 to 2 increases the apparent volume of the room eight times (length, width, and height all doubled). Level Level Direct sound Early reflections Level Direct sound Direct sound Early reflections Small Early reflections Large Time Small space Time Time Large space ● INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) P. INIT. DLY (Presence Initial Delay) How it Affects the Sound: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound. Since the distance between a sound source and a reflective surface determines the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection, this parameter changes the location of the sound source within the acoustic environment. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the presence side of the sound field. The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. Control Range: 1 – 99 milliseconds What it Does: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the rear surround side of the sound field. The larger the value, the later the first reflection begins. Control Range: 1 – 99 milliseconds For a small living room this parameter would be set for a small value. Large values for a big room. Larger values produce an echo effect. Level Level Control Range: 1 – 49 milliseconds Direct sound Early reflections Small INIT. DLY 58 Time Level Large INIT. DLY Time INIT. DLY Time P. LIVENESS (Presence Liveness) How it Affects the Sound: This parameter changes the apparent reflectivity of the walls in the hall. English ● LIVENESS Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the front presence sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the front presence sound field becomes. The early reflections from a sound source will lose intensity (decay) much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has mostly reflective surfaces. A room with highly reflective surfaces in which the early reflections decay slowly is termed “live”, while a room with absorbent characteristics in which the reflections decay rapidly is termed “dead”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the walls on the rear surround sound field. The larger the value, the more reflective the rear surround sound field becomes. What it Does: Changes the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control Range: 0 – 10. Level Level Small Large Time Dead Level Direct sound Time Live Time ● REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) How it Affects the Sound: Control Range: The natural reverberation time of a room depends primarily on its size and the characteristics of its inner surfaces. This parameter, therefore, changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. 1.0 – 5.0 seconds. The reverb time in a small-to-medium size hall would be between 1 and 2, and in a large hall it is normally between 2 and 3. What it Does: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the level of the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (1 kHz). Level Level 60 dB Direct sound Level Early reflections Small 60 dB Time REV. TIME Reverberations Large 60 dB Time REV. TIME Reverberations REV. TIME Time Reverberations 59 ● REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) ● EFCT TRIM (Effect Trim) This parameter sets the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound will begin. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like the space of the acoustic environment has become larger. Performs fine adjustment of the level of all the effect sounds. Control Range: –3 dB to 3 dB ● S. DELAY (Surround Delay) 0 – 250 milliseconds Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the rear surround side sound field. The larger the value, the later the surround sound field is generated. Level Direct sound 60 dB Reverberations Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME ● REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Direct sound REV. LEVEL Time 60 Control Range: Control Range: When the Dolby Pro Logic Surround is decoded: 15 – 30 milliseconds When the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS is decoded: 0 – 15 milliseconds When a program without the Dolby Surround or the DTS encoded is used: 0 – 15 milliseconds English SETTING THE SLEEP TIMER If you use the SLEEP timer of this unit, you can make this unit turn into the standby mode. When you are going to sleep while enjoying a broadcast or other desired input source, this timer function is helpful. Notes ● The SLEEP timer can be controlled only with the remote control transmitter. ● The components on which the SLEEP timer is effective are the sources connected to the SWITCHED AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. To set the SLEEP time To cancel the selected SLEEP time 1 A B A C SLEEP B SLEEP C REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Press once or more so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the display. (It will soon disappear and the “SLEEP” indicator will go off from the display.) Press once or more to select the desired SLEEP time. Note The SLEEP timer setting can also be canceled by turning this unit into the standby mode with the STANDBY/ON switch on the front panel (or the STANDBY key on the remote control transmitter) or disconnecting the power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. Indicates the SLEEP time. TV/DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX SLEEP LD MD/TAPE 1 TUNER CD PHONO Flashes. Whenever the SLEEP key is pressed, the SLEEP time will change as follows. (Minutes) 120 90 60 30 The SLEEP timer is off (OFF). (The state before the SLEEP key is pressed.) After a while, the display returns to the indication before the SLEEP timer is set. 2 The unit will be turned into the standby mode automatically at the selected SLEEP time. 61 REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER BASIC OPERATIONS (When the lid is open) The remote control transmitter provided with this unit is designed to control all the most commonly used functions of this unit. If the CD player, tape deck, tuner, LD player, etc. connected to this unit are YAMAHA components designed for remote control compatibility, then this remote control transmitter will also control various functions of each component. * For basic operations, use the remote control transmitter with the lid open. NAMES OF KEYS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS I TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE H A/B MD/TAPE 1 A CD 1 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC LD G TV/DBS 2 VCR 2 C DVD/VCR 3 PRESET V-AUX HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 1 2 3 TAPE 2 MON JAZZ CLUB ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT 4 5 PHONO 8 10 LEVEL 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF E 12 LIGHT 7 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 PARAMETER D TEST MACRO SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON OFF 5 6 7 8 9 6 CONCERT CONCERT TV VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER MASTER VOLUME QUICK 4 F A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE VCR STANDBY 0 C SLOW 3 B A REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Lid is opened. 62 Side panel J 2 CD/LD player keys Control compact disc player or LD player. (To control compact disc player, set the A/B/C switch (G) to the “A” position. To control LD player, set the A/B/C switch (G) to the “B” position.) * DISC is applicable only to compact disc changer. * STOP is applicable only to LD player. 3 Tuner keys Control tuner. (The A/B/C switch (G) should be set to the “A” position.) +: Selects higher preset station number. –: Selects lower preset station number. A/B/C/D/E: Selects the group (A – E) of preset station numbers. 4 DSP program selector keys Select a DSP program when the built-in digital sound field processor (including the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder and the DTS decoder) is on. 5 LEVEL key When you will adjust output level of the center speaker(s), rear speakers, front effect speakers or subwoofer, first press this key once or more so that the name of speaker(s) whose level you want to adjust appears on the display. While the name is illuminated on the display, you can change the level by pressing the + or – keys (D) A RESET button This button is inside the battery compartment. Press this button to “reset” the internal microcomputer which controls remote control operations. Microcomputer “reset” is necessary when the remote control freezes. * Pressing the RESET button will not erase learned functions. RESET button B MASTER VOLUME (up) and Turn the volume level up and down. (down) keys C MUTE key When pressed, this key mutes the volume level. To resume the original volume level, press this key again. While muting, the indicator on the VOLUME control flashes continuously. D / and –/+ keys (up) and (down) keys change parameters (or functions) in the mode selected by the PARAMETER/SET MENU switch. – and + keys make an adjustment or setting change on the parameter (or function) selected by the or key. E EFFECT ON/OFF key Switches on/off the digital sound field processor (including the Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, the Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder and the DTS decoder). F A/B/C indicators The position (A, B or C) selected by the A/B/C switch is shown in red. G A/B/C switch Set to the PARAMETER position when you edit a parameter of a DSP program. Set to the SET MENU position when you will make an adjustment or setting change on a function in the SET MENU mode. This switch must be used only when the lid of the remote control transmitter is open. (This switch will not function when the lid is closed.) Normally, set this switch to the “A” position. When controlling a Yamaha LD player by using the CD/LD player keys (2), set this switch to the “B” position. 7 TEST key H Input selector keys 6 PARAMETER/SET MENU switch Used for speaker balance adjustment. (For details, refer to pages 29 to 31.) 8 SLEEP timer key This key is used to turn the built-in SLEEP timer on and off, and to set the SLEEP time. (For details, refer to page 61.) 9 ON SCREEN display key Changes the type of display showing the program name and parameters, or information for various setting changes and adjustments on the connected monitor’s screen. Whenever pressed, the screen changes to a full display, a simple display and no display in turn. 0 SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys Pressing the SYSTEM POWER ON key turns the power to this unit on and pressing the STANDBY key turns this unit into the standby mode. English 1 Tape deck keys Control tape deck. (The A/B/C switch (G) should be set to the “A” position.) * DIR A, B and A/B are applicable only to double cassette tape deck. * For a single cassette deck with automatic reverse function, pressing DIR A will reverse the direction of tape running. Select input source. The TAPE 2 MON key differs from other input selector keys in function. It is identical with the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button on the front panel. Refer to page 23 for details. I TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator Lights up when the remote control transmitter is transmitting infrared signals (when a command key is pressed). J LIGHT key If this key is pressed, some of the keys on the remote control unit light up for about 5 seconds. If this key is pressed while those keys are lighting up, they stop lighting. Note When using the keys to control Yamaha components, identify them with your component’s keys. If these keys are identical, their functions will be the same. For each key function, refer to the corresponding instruction in your component’s manual. 63 LEARNING NEW CONTROL FUNCTIONS (When the lid is open) This is a learning remote control transmitter. The shaded keys in the illustration shown below can be programmed to “learn” control functions from other remote control transmitters. By learning key-functions from other remote control transmitter, this unit can then be used in place of one or more other remote control transmitters, thus making operation of your various audio and video components more convenient. Some of the “learning-capable” keys are originally empty and others have already been preset with functions to control this unit and other Yamaha components. You can store new functions to them (in place of preset functions) as desired. * See page 70 for the learning method. * See page 72 for clearing a learned function (or all learned functions). Note If the memory capacity of the remote control transmitter becomes full, no further learning is possible even if some learning-capable keys are not occupied with new functions. If, for example, you store Yamaha codes only into this remote control transmitter, up to about 50 functions can be stored. Store new functions to the learnable-capable keys which are useful for you. Keys which can have three functions (1, 2, 3, 4) In the “Learning-capable” keys, the keys numbered 1–4 in the illustration at left can have three functions. This is because they have three memory areas (A, B and C). (One function per area.) You can store new functions into the area B and C, and use three functions on a key by switching the memory areas with the A/B/C switch. (Area A cannot learn a new function.) 1 * TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B MD/TAPE 1 To use these keys: 1. Before using a key, select the area A, B or C of the key on which A CD 1 the function you want to use is stored by using the A/B/C switch. A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC LD TV/DBS 2 A/B/C switch TUNER 2. Press the key. The original factory settings of these keys are as follows. VCR 2 C DVD/VCR 3 3 PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX HALL 1 1 JAZZ CLUB 4 HALL 2 CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 2 3 TAPE 2 MON ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT 4 5 6 PHONO CONCERT CONCERT TV VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 LEVEL 1 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT 2 ON/OFF 12 PARAMETER 3 TEST SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV 1 MUTE VCR STANDBY REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Lid is open. * 64 1 4 The position of A/B/C switch C A B Empty Preset with Empty functions for controlling a Yamaha tape deck. Preset with functions Empty Preset with for controlling a functions for Yamaha LD player. controlling a Yamaha CD player. (DISC is empty.) (STOP is empty.) Empty Empty Preset with functions for controlling a Yamaha tuner. Preset as the DSP Preset as the DSP Preset as the DSP program selector program selector program selector keys keys keys : These buttons are used for learning a new function or clearing a learned function (or all learned functions). For details, refer to pages 70 to 72 . Note The area A of all keys cannot learn new functions. To store new functions to these keys, store them onto the area B or C. Empty keys (1) These are empty keys. Each key can learn a function from another remote control transmitter. For example, the TV key is useful for storing the function of your TV’s power switch, and the VCR key can be used for your VCR’s power switch. About the marks shown on the remote control transmitter The marks on the remote control transmitter signify functions of keys, input sources, etc. Examples) (tape): (disc): (radio wave): About the lighting of keys When you press an input selector key, it lights up for about 3 seconds. When an input selector key in the group of selected memory area (A, B or C) is pressed, the mark of key group (1–3) which is the same as the mark of the selected input selector key lights up for about 3 seconds. Example) Tape deck, VCR, etc. CD player, LD player, etc. Tuner, TV/BS tuner, etc. These marks are helpful for storing new functions. Examples) • The area B of keys 1 is suitable for storing functions to control your VCR. • The area B of keys 3 is suitable for storing functions to control your TV/BS tuner. English Note If a key which has a preset function learns a new function, the preset function will not be deleted, but disabled. When the learned function is cleared, the preset function is restored. (For information on clearing a learned function, refer to page 72.) Lights up. TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B MD/TAPE 1 A CD Red (This shows that the memory area A is selected.) TUNER A STOP DIR VCR 1 B DISC B Conversely, when a key of group 1–3 is pressed, its mark and the input selector key with the same mark in the group of the selected memory area light up for about 3 seconds. This feature may be helpful for you if you store functions for controlling an input source to a group of keys whose mark lights up when the corresponding input selector key is pressed. 65 USING OPERATION CONTROL KEYS (When the lid is closed) When the lid of the remote control transmitter is closed, you can easily operate Yamaha components including learned functions by using the OPERATION CONTROL keys. TRANSMIT /LEARN TRANSMIT CLEAR REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B CD TUNER VCR 1 LD TV/DBS MD/TAPE 1 Input selector keys MD/TAPE 1 A CD 1 TUNER A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC LD TV/DBS 2 VCR 2 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 DVD/VCR 3 C 3 V-AUX /EXT. DECODER OPERATION CONTROL SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV V-AUX 1 OPERATION CONTROL keys EFFECT A/B/C/D/E HALL 1 TAPE 2 MON PHONO PRESET JAZZ CLUB HALL 2 CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 2 3 TAPE 2 MON ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT 4 5 6 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 10 LEVEL 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 PARAMETER TEST SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MASTER VOLUME TV MUTE VCR PHONO CONCERT CONCERT TV VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER MUTE VCR STANDBY STANDBY REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Lid is closed. When the lid is closed, the OPERATION CONTROL keys substitute for the keys numbered 1, 2 and 3 on the above illustration. To use these keys, you do not have to switch the A/B/C switch. The functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out are determined by which input selector key was pressed before using the OPERATION CONTROL keys. 66 Note When the lid is closed, the EFFECT, MASTER VOLUME, MUTE, TV and VCR keys will function in the same way as when the lid is open. * If the MACRO switch on the side of the remote control transmitter is set to “OFF”, when the lid is closed, the SYSTEM POWER ON and STANDBY keys also will function in the same way as when the lid is open. To operate a Yamaha CD player 1. Press the “CD” input selector key. 2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the functions in area A of keys 2.) OPERATION CONTROL Skip to previous track To operate your VCR 1. Press the “VCR” input selector key. 2. Use the OPERATION CONTROL keys. (They carry out the functions in area B of keys 1. This area is originally preset with no function. You must store the functions related to controlling the VCR in area B of keys 1 beforehand.) Play OPERATION CONTROL Skip to next track Rewind English Examples of operations controlled by using the OPERATION CONTROL keys Play Fast forward Pause or Stop Pause or Stop See the table below for a combination of an input selector key and key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out. (Also, refer to the table on page 64.) Selected input selector MD/TAPE 1 CD Key functions which the OPERATION CONTROL keys carry out Functions in area A of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) Functions in area A of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, and ) TUNER Functions in area A of keys 3 VCR 1 Functions in area B of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) LD TV/DBS VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 V-AUX Functions in area B of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, and ) Functions in area B of keys 3 Functions in area C of keys 1 (except REC/PAUSE, A/B, DIR A and B) Functions in area C of keys 2 (except STOP, DISC, and ) Functions in area C of keys 3 Pressing the “TAPE 2 MON” or “PHONO” input selector key has no effect on the OPERATION CONTROL keys. Notes • If the OPERATION CONTROL keys substitute for keys which have no function (empty), no command is carried out. According to your plan, store functions from other remote control transmitters into an empty area of those keys. (Refer to page 70 for the learning method.) • While playing an audio/video unit, if you want to operate another unit by using the remote control transmitter (for example, if you want to rewind a tape on your VCR while listening to a CD), you should open the lid of the remote control transmitter and use the A/B/C switch and the corresponding keys. (If you press an input selector key with the lid closed to change the functions of the OPERATION CONTROL keys to the functions for controlling a VCR, the input of currently playing CD source is canceled.) About the lighting of keys When an input selector key is pressed, the pressed key and only the available OPERATION CONTROL keys (which substitute for the keys stored with the preset functions or learned functions) light up for about 3 seconds. So you will know what keys are available at a glance. OPERATION CONTROL TUNER Conversely, when an OPERATION CONTROL key is pressed, all of the available OPERATION CONTROL keys and the currently selected input selector key light up. 67 MACRO OPERATIONS (When the lid is closed) Preset macro keys are originally preset with macros. If you prefer, however, you can change the contents of a macro key by storing a desired series of functions on it. You can store up to seven functions onto a macro key. (Refer to page 71 for the learning method.) “Macro” is a command which defines a sequence of several operations. The keys shown in the illustrations below (as preset macro keys) are also preset with macros, in addition to individual functions. Each macro key is preset so that simply pressing it alone will carry out several functions of other keys on this remote control transmitter sequentially. (To know what key functions are sequentially carried out by pressing each preset macro key, see the next page.) Macros can be used only when the lid is closed and the MACRO switch is set to “SLOW” or “QUICK”. (If “OFF” is selected, no macro will function even if the lid is closed.) Setting the MACRO switch OFF: In this position, no macro will function even if the lid of remote control transmitter is closed. QUICK: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each command is transmitted at 0.5 second intervals. SLOW: In this position, when a macro key is pressed, each command is transmitted at 3 second intervals. Preset macro keys TRANSMIT /LEARN TRANSMIT CLEAR REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER LEARN MACRO REC/PAUSE A/B MD/TAPE 1 MD/TAPE 1 CD CD A 1 TUNER TUNER VCR 1 A DIR VCR 1 B STOP B DISC LD LD TV/DBS TV/DBS 2 VCR 2 VCR 2 DVD/VCR 3 DVD/VCR 3 C PRESET A/B/C/D/E V-AUX V-AUX HALL 1 /EXT. DECODER 1 TAPE 2 MON JAZZ CLUB CHURCH /EXT. DECODER 2 3 TAPE 2 MON ROCK ENTERCONCERT TAINMENT 4 PHONO HALL 2 5 6 PHONO CONCERT CONCERT TV VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 THEATER EFFECT 7 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 OPERATION CONTROL 10 LEVEL 11 9 / DTS SURROUND EFFECT ON/OFF 12 PARAMETER SLOW MUTE VCR STANDBY MACRO switch MASTER VOLUME QUICK SYSTEM POWER ON TV OFF MACRO TEST SET MENU SLEEP ON SCREEN SYSTEM POWER ON MUTE VCR STANDBY REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER Lid is closed. (Set the MACRO switch to “QUICK” or “SLOW”.) 68 MASTER VOLUME TV English Preset macro keys and the key functions which they carry out sequentially are as follows. (Also, refer to the table on page 64.) Function of the key (and area) which operates when a macro key is pressed Macro key 1st (Turning the power of this unit on) 2nd (Selecting an input source) 3rd (Playing a source) MD/TAPE 1 MD/TAPE 1 “ ” on area A of keys 1 CD CD “ ” on area A of keys 2 TUNER TUNER VCR 1 VCR 1 “ ” on area B of keys 1 LD “ ” on area B of keys 2 LD SYSTEM POWER ON – – TV/DBS TV/DBS VCR 2 VCR 2 “ ” on area C of keys 1 DVD/VCR 3 DVD/VCR 3 “ ” on area C of keys 2 V-AUX V-AUX – TAPE 2 MON TAPE 2 MON – PHONO PHONO – Function of the key which operates when a macro key is pressed Macro key SYSTEM POWER ON 1st 2nd SYSTEM POWER ON TV 3rd VCR – STANDBY Notes A key in which no function is stored will carry out no command. • If it occurs that this unit will not receive the second command because the internal operation of the first command takes a long time, set the MACRO switch to the “SLOW” position, or add no function or repeat the same command between the first command and the next command. • If you program the power on/off switching function of TV, VCR, etc. as part of a macro sequence, note that it switches the current mode to the other (“on” to “off”, or “off” to “on”). For example, when you press the macro key, if the power of TV, VCR, etc. is already on, the power will be turned off even though you may not want it to do so. • – STANDBY • • • Once you press a macro key, this unit will not receive the command of another key (even if it is pressed) until this unit finishes carrying out all commands of the macro key. Take notice of this especially when the MACRO switch is in the “SLOW” position. Once you press a macro key, you must keep the remote control transmitter directed at the main unit’s remote control sensor until the remote control transmitter finishes transmitting all command signals of the macro key. You can also use the OPERATION CONTROL keys while using the macro functions. 69 LEARNING A NEW FUNCTION 1 Place this remote control transmitter and the other remote control transmitter so that they face each other. 5 Press and hold the key (on the other remote control transmitter) which has the function you want to store. This remote control transmitter TV RTS O 1 Z M 5 IU V O V TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO (Press by using the point of a mechanical pencil, etc.) Flashes slowly. When learning is finished, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator stops lighting. You can release the key. Then the indicator begins flashing slowly. * If a signal is not successfully received, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode prior to step 4 is restored. If this occurs, restart from step 4. * If memory capacity is full, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly to show you that learning is impossible, and then the mode before you began learning operations is restored. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the LEARN button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. If this occurs, repeat this step. 6 3 7 If necessary, select the memory area by using the A/B/C switch on the side panel of the remote control transmitter. O 2 T C FE F EF /OF ON About 5–10 cm (2–4 in.) N O H X U -A T C FE F EF /OF ON N O H X 0 1 U -A P T ES P 3 CO IS D 2 6 H M IU RC U CH 9 5 UB ST CL TE ZZ JA 8 AD ST K OC 3 H RC U CH 9 CO IS 6 B D U CL TV RTS O SP 4 AD ST 2 1 Other remote control transmitter Repeat step 3–5 to store more functions. When you finish the learning operation, press the LEARN button. CLEAR 4 Press the key on this remote control transmitter in which you will store a new function. Lights up. X U -A V O N O H P 3 T C CO FE F IS D EF /OF 2 6 ON H M IU RC AD U ST CH 9 1 5 UB TV RTS ST CL O TE ZZ SP JA 8 4 0 CK RO +1 7 L L E * If a key which cannot learn another function is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. If this occurs, repeat this step. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after a key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. If this occurs, restart from step 2. 70 LEARN MACRO Notes ● Newly learned functions will replace previously learned functions. ● If there is no more room in the memory area for a function to be learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator will flash rapidly. In this case, even if some keys are not occupied with functions from other remote control transmitters, no further learning is possible. ● If you close the lid while learning, and then about 5 seconds pass, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before beginning learning operations is restored. If this occurs, restart from step 2. However, if you open the lid within 5 seconds, the mode before closing the lid is restored. ● There may occasionally be instances in which, due to the signal-coding and modulation employed by the other remote control transmitter, this remote control transmitter will not be able to “learn” its signals. ● When you press the LEARN, MACRO or CLEAR button, or the RESET button inside of the battery compartment by using a sharp-pointed thing, be careful not to damage the button. If you will use a mechanical pencil, make sure that the lead is not coming out. English MAKING A NEW MACRO A new macro can be programmed onto any preset macro key in place of preset functions. (See page 68 to know what keys are preset macro keys.) You can make as many as 13 new macro keys. A macro key can learn as many as seven functions of other keys. Note If you store a continuous command such as lowering of volume level, it will become a short command when it is carried out as a part of macro. 1 4 TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO Flashes slowly. * If there is no operation for about 30 seconds after the MACRO button is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you pressed the MACRO button is restored. If this occurs, press the MACRO button again. 2 Repeat step 3 to store the second, the third and more functions. You can store up to seven key functions in series as a macro. * If the seventh key function has been learned, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. (This shows that the key has completed learning a series of functions as a macro.) If this occurs, you do not have to follow the next step. 5 When you finish learning, press the MACRO button. Press a preset macro key on which you want to make a new macro. CD CLEAR LEARN MACRO TRANSMIT /LEARN Lights up. It is recommended to write down new key functions you stored on the provided user function stickers and paste them on the reverse side of the remote control transmitter or the reverse side of the remote control transmitter’s lid. * If a key other than a preset macro key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. If this occurs, repeat this step. 3 Press a key whose function you want to store as the first function of the new macro. A B SYSTEM POWER ON TRANSMIT /LEARN C Goes off. (When learning is finished, this indicator lights up again.) REMOTE CONTROL TRANSMITTER * If a key whose function cannot be stored as a command of macro is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. If this occurs, repeat this step. * If about 30 seconds pass before a key is pressed, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the mode before you began learning operations is restored. If this occurs, restart from step 1. Memory back-up All of the learned functions will be retained while you replace the batteries. However, if no batteries are installed for a few hours, the learned functions will be erased and will have to be learned again. 71 CLEARING LEARNED FUNCTIONS To Clear a Learned Function 1 To Clear All Learned Functions To clear a learned key function, press the LEARN button using the point of a mechanical pencil, etc. To clear a macro you made, press the MACRO button. 1 Select the kind of key functions all of which you want to clear by using the MACRO switch on the side panel of the remote control transmitter. or SLOW QUICK OFF MACRO TRANSMIT /LEARN CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF: Flashes slowly. 2 Press and hold the CLEAR button using the point of a mechanical pencil, etc. Select this position if you want to clear all of the learned functions except macros. QUICK: Select this position if you want to clear all of the macros you made. SLOW: Select this position if you want to clear all of the learned functions including macros. 2 CLEAR LEARN MACRO Press the CLEAR button using the point of a mechanical pencil, etc. TRANSMIT /LEARN 3 CLEAR Holding the CLEAR button pressed, press and hold the key whose function you want to clear until the indicator flashes 3 times. CD TRANSMIT /LEARN Flashes. To clear two or more functions sequentially, do not release the CLEAR button pressed, and repeat this step. Note If you clear a learned function of a key, the originally preset function of the key is restored (except the keys which are originally preset with no function.) LEARN MACRO Flashes slowly. * If one of the following operation is made after you press the CLEAR button, the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator flashes rapidly and the current mode is canceled. If this occurs, press the CLEAR button again. • MACRO switch is switched to another position. • Another key is pressed. • There is no operation for about 30 seconds. 3 Press and hold the CLEAR button again. While holding the CLEAR button pressed, press and hold the MASTER VOLUME and keys simultaneously until the indicator flashes 7 times. TRANSMIT /LEARN MUTE Flashes. 72 If the unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple measures suggested. If it cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for help. English TROUBLESHOOTING General SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY The unit fails to turn on when the STANDBY/ON switch is pressed, or turns into the standby mode suddenly soon after the power is turned on. Power cord is not plugged in or is not completely inserted. Firmly plug in the power cord. The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not set to either end closely. Set the switch to either end closely. It happens that this unit does not work normally. There is an influence of strong external noise (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or a misoperation on this unit while using this unit. Turn this unit into the standby mode and disconnect the AC power cord from the AC outlet. After about 30 seconds have passed, connect the power and operate this unit again. No sound or no picture. Incorrect output cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. Appropriate input source is not selected. Select the appropriate input source with the INPUT SELECTOR or the TAPE 2 MON/EXT. DECODER button. Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. Digital signals other than PCM audio and the Dolby Digital (AC-3) (or the DTS) encoded signals which this unit cannot reproduce are input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. No picture There is no S video terminal connection between this unit and the TV, though S video signals are input to this unit. Connect this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV’s S video input terminal. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of short circuit etc. Turn this unit into the standby mode, and then turn on to reset the protection circuit. The SLEEP timer has functioned. Cancel the SLEEP timer function. Incorrect setting of the BALANCE control. Adjust it to the appropriate position. Incorrect cord connections. Connect the cords properly. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. The EFFECT button is set off. Press the EFFECT button to turn it on. A Dolby Surround (or DTS) decoding program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround (or DTS). Use a different sound field program. The function “1E. FRONT MIX” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “ON-5ch” position. Set to the “OFF-7ch” position. PRO LOGIC/Normal, DOLBY DIGITAL/ Normal or DTS DIGITAL SUR./Normal of the DSP program No. 12 is selected. Select another program (or subprogram). The function “1A. CENTER SP” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “NONE” position. Select the appropriate position. One of the DSP programs No. 1 to No. 6 is selected when the input signal of source is 2-channel stereo (analog/PCM). Select another program. The input signals of source encoded with the Dolby Digital (AC-3) or the DTS do not have center channel signals. Refer to the instructions for the source currently played. The function “1D. LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU mode is set in the SWFR or BOTH position, though your system does not include a subwoofer. Select the MAIN position. Output mode selection for each channel (MAIN, CENTER or REAR) is improper. Make output mode selections suitable for your speaker system. Incorrect cord connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cords may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Make the GND connection between the turntable and this unit. The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The player should be connected to the unit through the MC head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or sound is distorted. The component connected to the MD/TAPE 1 REC terminals of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. Only one side speaker outputs the sound. No sound from the effect speakers. No sound from the front effect speakers. No sound from the center speaker. Poor bass reproduction. Sound “hums”. 73 SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY DSP parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. The function “9. MEMORY GUARD” in the SET MENU mode is set to the “ON” position. Set to the “OFF” position. “INPUT DATA ERROR” appears on the display and no sound is heard. A nonstandardized source is played back, or the unit playing back a source is misoperating. Check the source, or turn off the unit playing back the source and then turn on again. The sound field cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound field on a tape deck connected to this unit’s MD/TAPE 1 REC terminals. This unit do not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (lightning, excessive static electricity, etc.) or power supply with low voltage. Unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC outlet, and then plug in again after about one minute. A source cannot be recorded by a tape deck or VCR connected to this unit. The source unit is connected to this unit between digital terminals only. Make additional connection between analog terminals. Noise from nearby TV or tuner. This unit is too close to the affected equipment. Move the unit further away from the affected equipment. The sound is degraded when listening with the headphones connected to the compact disc player or tape deck that are connected with this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn the power to this unit on. Remote control transmitter SYMPTOM The remote control transmitter does not work. The remote control transmitter does not function properly. Learning cannot be made successfully. (The TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator does not light up or flash.) Continuous functions such as volume are learned, but operate only for a moment before stopping. 74 CAUSE REMEDY The batteries of this remote control transmitters are weak. Replace the batteries with new ones and press the RESET button on the remote control transmitter. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote control transmitter. Wrong distance or angle. The remote control transmitter will function from a maximum range of 6 meters, no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type of fluorescent lamp etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of the main unit. Change position of the main unit. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote control transmitter. The batteries of this remote control transmitter and/or the other remote control transmitter are weak. Replace the batteries (and press the RESET button for this remote control transmitter). The distance between the two remote control transmitters is too long or too short. Place the remote control transmitters with the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control transmitter is not compatible with this remote control transmitter. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary commands. The internal microcomputer “freezes”. Press the RESET button on the remote control transmitter. Learning process incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function key on the other remote control transmitter until the TRANSMIT/LEARN indicator begins flashing slowly. SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY The player which plays back the source is not connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit. The player must be connected to a digital audio signal input terminal of this unit besides analog audio signal terminal connections. The “ANALOG” input mode is selected on this unit. Select a proper input mode on this unit to turn on the DTS decoder built into this unit. A percussive noise is heard when you begin playing back a source encoded with the DTS. If the “AUTO” input mode is selected, depending on some sources, there may be a case that a noise is heard while this unit is identifying the format of input signal. Set the input mode of the currently selected input source to “DTS”. No sound is heard when you play back a source encoded with the DTS, even though the “AUTO” or “DTS” input mode is selected on this unit. The DTS decoder built into this unit does not function because the player has a digital volume control and it is set at a position other than “maximum”, “neutral” or “ineffective”. Set the player’s digital volume control at the maximum, neutral or ineffective position. No sound is heard when you play back an MD onto which you have recorded a source encoded with the DTS. A source encoded with the DTS cannot be recorded onto an MD. No sound is heard when you play back a DAT onto which you have recorded a source encoded with the DTS. Depending on a DAT deck, a source encoded with the DTS cannot be recorded onto a DAT. No sound is heard when you play back a source (CD etc.) even though the currently selected input mode is “AUTO”. In the “AUTO” mode, the DTS-decoding mode cannot be changed to the normal (PCM) digital signal input mode automatically. A loud hissing noise is heard when you play back a source encoded with the DTS. English When playing back a source encoded with the DTS: Press the INPUT MODE button on the front panel or the input selector button (for the currently selected source) on the remote control transmitter so that “PCM” appears on the display. Notes • It is necessary to use a DTS decoder to play back a source encoded with the DTS, so the player which plays back a source must be connected to a digital audio input terminal of this unit in the way described in this manual. If this connection is not made or only a D/A converter is used without using a DTS decoder, when you play back a source, only a loud hiss noise will be heard. • If you make a search (or skip etc.) operation while playing back a source encoded with the DTS, the “PCM” indicator lights up on the display. This is because this unit automatically changes the DTS-decoding mode to the normal (PCM) digital signal input mode to prevent a noise from being output. • A source encoded with the DTS cannot be recorded onto analog audio and video tapes, and also, an analog tape recorded with a source encoded with the DTS cannot be played back. The same result is obtained for MDs and DATs (depending on a DAT deck used for recording and/or playback). 75 SPECIFICATIONS Minimum RMS Output Power Per Channel (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8Ω) ....................................................................... 110W+110W CENTER (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8Ω) ........ 110W REAR L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8Ω) ........................................................................110W+110W FRONT L/R (1 kHz, 0.05% THD, 8Ω).................35W+35W Maximum Power [China and General models only] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6Ω (When both channels are driven) MAIN L/R ........................................................150W+150W CENTER ....................................................................150W REAR L/R .......................................................150W+150W FRONT L/R.........................................................45W+45W Dynamic Power Per Channel (by IHF Dynamic Headroom Measuring Method) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] MAIN L/R (8Ω/6Ω/4Ω) (When both channels are driven) .......... 150W/180W/240W Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models only] MAIN L/R (8Ω) ............................................................. 1.3 dB DIN Standard Output Power Per Channel [Europe and U.K. models only] MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4Ω) (When both channels are driven)................................ 180W IEC Power [Europe and U.K. models only] MAIN L/R (1 kHz, 0.015% THD, 8Ω) (When both channels are driven)................................ 120W Damping Factor MAIN L/R, CENTER (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8Ω) ...................................................................... More than 200 Input Sensitivity/Impedance (100W/8Ω) CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX................... 150 mV/47 kΩ PHONO MM.....................................................2.5 mV/47 kΩ MAIN IN ..................................................................1V/47 kΩ Maximum Input Signal (1 kHz, 0.05% THD, EFFECT ON) CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX .................................. 2.3V PHONO MM ............................................................ 130 mV Output Level/Impedance REC OUT...................................................... 150 mV/1.5 kΩ PRE OUT MAIN, CENTER, REAR, FRONT ....................... 1V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (SPLIT L, R) (EFFECT OFF) ........................................................................ 1.2V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (MONO) (EFFECT OFF) ........................................................................... 2V/1.2 kΩ Maximum Voltage Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1% THD) PRE OUT (MAIN L/R) ..................................... More than 3V 76 Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance Output Level (CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX Input: 50 mV, RL=8Ω) .................................................................................... 0.2V Impedance .................................................................. 100Ω Frequency Response (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX to MAIN L/R SP OUT .............................................................................. 0±0.5 dB RIAA Equalization Deviation (20 Hz to 20 kHz) PHONO MM ............................................................0±0.5 dB Total Harmonic Distortion (20 Hz to 20 kHz) CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX to PRE OUT (MAIN L/R), 1V............................................................. Less than 0.005% PHONO MM to REC OUT, 3V ................... Less than 0.01% MAIN IN to SP OUT (MAIN L/R, CENTER), 40W/8Ω ................................................................. Less than 0.005% MAIN IN to SP OUT (MAIN L/R, CENTER), 50W/6Ω ................................................................. Less than 0.008% Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX (Input Shorted 150 mV) (EFFECT OFF) .......................................... More than 96 dB PHONO MM (Input Shorted 5 mV) (EFFECT OFF) ....................................................................More than 86 dB Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) MAIN L/R SP OUT.................................... Less than 150 µV Channel Separation (Vol –30 dB) CD/TUNER/MDzTAPE 1/TAPE 2/LD/TVzDBS/VCR 1 /VCR 2/DVDzVCR 3/VIDEO AUX Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted (EFFECT OFF) 1 kHz/10 kHz ......... More than 70 dB/60 dB PHONO MM Input Shorted (EFFECT OFF) 1 kHz/10 kHz ..................................More than 70 dB/60 dB Tone Control Characteristics Bass Boost/Cut .................................................. ±10 dB (50 Hz) Turnover frequency ................................................ 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ................................................. ±10 dB (20 kHz) Turnover frequency ............................................... 3.5 kHz Center Channel Graphic Equalizer Frequency ................... 100 Hz/300 Hz/1 kHz/3 kHz/10 kHz Boost/Cut ................................................................... ±6 dB Q ..................................................................................... 0.7 Bass Extension (MAIN L/R) ............................. +6 dB (70 Hz) Low Pass Filter Characteristics SUBWOOFER (fc = 90 Hz) ................................. 24 dB/oct. English CINEMA Equalizer High-shelving filter Frequency .......................................... 1.0 kHz to 12.7 kHz Boost/Cut ................................................... –9 dB to +6 dB Parametric equalizer Frequency .......................................... 1.0 kHz to 12.7 kHz Boost/Cut ................................................... –9 dB to +6 dB Q ................................................................................. 1.85 AC Outlets 2 SWITCHED OUTLETS [U.S.A. model] ......................................... 120W max. total [Canada, China and General models] ..... 100W max. total 1 SWITCHED OUTLET [Europe, U.K. and Australia models] ............... 100W max. 1 UNSWITCHED OUTLET [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 180W max. [China and General models] ........................... 200W max. Audio Muting ............................................................... –20 dB Video Section Video Signal Type [U.S.A. and Canada Models] .....................................NTSC [Europe, U.K. and Australia models] .......................... PAL [China and General Models] ............................ NTSC/PAL Video Signal Level ............................................. 1 Vp-p/75Ω S-Video Signal Level Y ...................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75Ω C .............................................................. 0.286 Vp-p/75Ω Maximum Input Level ............................ More than 1.5 Vp-p Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................ More than 50 dB Monitor Out Frequency Response .......................................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................... AC 120V/60 Hz [Europe and U.K. models] ........................... AC 230V/50 Hz [Australia model] ......................................... AC 240V/50 Hz [China and General models] ........................................... AC 110/120/220/240V 60/50 Hz Power Consumption [U.S.A., Europe, U.K., Australia, China and General models] .................................................................................... 500W [Canada model] ...............................................500W/650 VA Dimensions (W x H x D) [U.S.A., Canada, Europe, U.K. and Australia models] .......................................................... 435 x 190.5 x 473 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”) [China and General models (without side panels)] .......................................................... 435 x 190.5 x 473 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”) [China and General models (with side panels)] .......................................................... 473 x 190.5 x 473 mm (18-5/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”) Weight [U.S.A., Canada, Europe, U.K. and Australia models] ................................................................. 23.0 kg (50.6 lbs.) [China and General models (without side panels)] ................................................................. 23.0 kg (50.6 lbs.) [China and General models (with side panels)] .................................................................... 25.0 kg (55 lbs.) Accessories....................................Remote control transmitter Batteries User function stickers * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 77 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA VV58000